Home

"user manual"

1. SSSSLLg LLL L Lp Open SSS S O SSS S O SSSS OU OOO O U Close SSS S C SSS S C SSSS CU CCC C U Test SSS S G SSS S G SSSS Gg GGG G g Section 25 System Communication Restore SSS S R SSS S R SSSS RZ Alarm RRR R Z ACRestore SSS S Ra SSS S Ra SSSSRa Ae RARARA RA Ac LoBatRes SSS S R SSS S R SSSSRi Lg RLR_ RL Ry LB Trouble Res SSS S RT SSS S RT SSSS Ryt R7R7Rzq Rt Bypass Res SSS S Rp SSS S Rp SSSS Rgb RgRgRpg Rp b Where SSS or SSSS Subscriber ID C Close Code 1st digit Alarm Code 1st digit U User Number 1st and 2nd digits Typically Zone Number 2nd digit Gg Test Code 1st and 2nd digits Tt Trouble Code 1st and 2nd digits R Restore Code Alarm 1st and 2nd digits Bb Bypass Code 1st and 2nd digits R t Restore Code Trbl 1st and 2nd digits EAc AC Loss Code 1st and 2nd digits Rgb Restore Code Byps 1st and 2nd digits LLg Low Battery Code 1st and 2nd digits R Ac Open Code 1st Digit R Lg Restore Code Bat 1st and 2nd digits Zone numbers for x or B 999 3 or C 996 1 or A 995 Duress 992 Restore Code AC 1st and 2nd digits ADEMCO Contact ID Reporting takes the following format CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ where CCCC Customer Subscriber D Q Event qualifier where E new event and R restore EEE Event code 3 hexadecimal digits GG Partition number system messages show 0
2. Enter the Common Lobby Partition 1 2 Enter Oif none 118 AFFECTS LOBBY partition specific of Enter Lif this partition affects the common lobby The system will not arm the lobby unless this partition is armed already Also will cause lobby to disarm when this partition disarms Enter O if the partition does not affect the common lobby 119 ARMS LOBBY partition specific of Enter Lif arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the common lobby partition automatically Can only arm lobby if all other affecting partitions are armed To enable this field field 1x18 must also be enabled partition specific Enter Oif arming this partition will not attempt to arm the common lobby partition 1 20 EXIT ERROR LOGIC ENABLE 0 Enter 1 to enable entry exit doors and interior points will be bypassed if left open Enter Oif Exit Error Logic is not desired Must be O for UL commercial burglary installations 1 21 EXIT DELAY RESET 0 Enter 1 to reset exit delay to 60 seconds after door is closed Enter Oif exit delay not to be reset Must be O for UL commercial burglary installations 122 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE poof 1 Enter the first pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary installations 1 23 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO 00 00 Lo Em Enter the second pair of zones which
3. 23 20 AUX Sandby PW oiia eee ele C 1 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment 008 12 5 AUXILIARY INPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE Enitonnemoni a a 23 18 Auxiliary Relay ssssssssssssnsssssrrrrrrressrrrrrrreesrnnn 1 4 15 1 Auxiliary Relay 4 Wire Smoke Detector Reset 15 2 Auxiliary Relay Alarm Activation eeren 15 1 Auxiliary Relay Battery Saver ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 2 Auxiliary Relay Trouble Supervisory Activation 15 2 Backup Balter y oeiia a C 1 Backup Battery Calculations ccccssssseeeeeeeeeees 19 2 BaKUD Wl al CF aas Ea N 1 5 BACKUP DIALER TOUCHTONE ROTARY 23 19 Basic Hardwired ZONES ccccccsssssseeeeeeeesesseeeeeees 1 1 6 1 BATEE re eaaes 4 4 Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet 19 5 Battery Selection Table ssssssssssssssrrrrrrresssrnrrrreesn 19 6 Battery TESE usii keniota odiei 30 1 BELL 1 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING 23 2 BELLL TIMEOUT mrut an 23 2 Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs ssssssssnsssssrrnrrrrssssrnrrenee 14 1 BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DIN Grenager 23 19 BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY TIMEOUT eee 23 19 Bell Circuit Supervision sssssssssssessssrrnrrrreesrrrrrenee 14 1 Bell OIE UES nea e USN sheevaue ee tenens 1 4 Bell Outputs PrograMMing cccccccceessssseeeeeeeeeeeees 14 3 Built in User s Manual ccccccsssseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeneens 1 6 BURG ALARM COMM DELAY ceses 23 10 BURG TRIGGER FOR R
4. 25 10 SECTION 26 Downloading Primer Remote downloading is not a UL Listed feature In This Section General Information Gating On Line with a Control Pand On Line Control Functions Access Security Connecting a 4100SM Modulefor Direct Wire Downloading General Information Downloading allows the operator to remotely access program and control the security system over normal telephone lines Anything that can be done directly from the keypad can be done remotely using ADEMCO s COMPASS downloading software To communicate with the control panel the following is required 1 An IBM PC compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with 30 MB of available hard disk space and at least 8MB of RAM 12MB is preferred Windows 3 X Windows 95 or Windows NT 2 Oneof the following modems Hayes Smartmodem 1200 external level 1 2 or higher internal level 1 1 or higher Hayes Optima 24 Fax 96 external Hayes Optima 336 BizComp I ntellimodem 1200 w volume BizComp Intelli modem 2400 Note Other brands are not compatible even if claimed to be 100 compatible 3 COMPASS DOWNLOADING software may be purchased from ADEMCO This software is available on 3 1 2 diskettes or CD ROM and Includes a complete User s Manual It may also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page The web address is http www ademco com Internal modems must have a 4 position DIP switch Modems with a 6 position DIP switch will not work
5. General Information TheJ 2 connector located in the upper right hand corner of the main PCB provides 1 input labeled INPUT 1 and seven trigger outputs labeled OUT 1 OUT 7 that can be used to interface to the following e Remote keypad sounder e UL Listed keyswitch e 5140LED Indicator Module e Auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as an ADEMCO Long Range Subscriber Radio e Event logging serial printer via the 4100SM Interface Module e PC computer used to direct wire download the panel s programming information via the 4100SM Interface Module The trigger output ratings are listed below Note that all outputs are power limited Outputs 1 5 7 LOW 2K toground HIGH 10 14VDC 20 mA max Remaining Outputs LOW 1K toground HIGH 10 14 VDC through 5K The pin assignments for the J 2 connector are shown in Figure 12 1 Use a 4142TR 9 wire trigger cable one is supplied to interface with this connector The panel does not supervise field wiring connected to this connector Program fields 3 19 and 3x20 are used to select the functions of INPUT 1 and OUT 1 7 as indicated in Figure 12 1 When using J2 for LORRA Input 1 Pin 9 is supervised by Zone 973 which is used for supervision of the LORRA XMIT OKAY signal Assign a 24 hr zone response type 5 or 19 to this zone 12 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide J2 CONNECTOR FIELD 3 19 0 FIELD 3 19 0 FIELD 3 19 0 FIELD 3 19 1 FIELD 3 2
6. ON ENTER 1 FOR VOICE DESCRIPTOR OFF ENTER O Press Oor Ltoturn the device off or on respectively N represents the 2 digit relay number and VOICE DESCRIPTOR ts the relay voice descriptor programmed by the installer see Relay Voice Descriptors in 93 Menu Mode of the Quick Start Guide nn DEVICE IS OFF Voice VOICE DESCRIPTOR DEVICE NN ON OFF TO WIT THE KEY EXIT ENTER 00 NOW From a keypad press to continue The ENTER DEVICE NO prompt will appear From a telephone keypad enter 00 to exit or enter the next relay number to be programmed The current on off state of that relay will be annunciated as described above Alternatively if 6 seconds elapses with no key depression the voice module will annunciate the ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW message A relay that has been designated as a fire relay is automatically restricted to prevent inadvertent activation deactivation by users Only the Installer Code can override this restriction If the installer attempts to access a fire relay the message RESTRICTED USE OVERRIDE will be displayed The relay can then be tested for manual operation 29 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 29 8 SECTION 30 Testing the System In This Section Battery Test Dialer Test FireDrill Test One Man Fire Walk Test Burglary Walk Test Armed Burglary System Test Trouble Conditions Turning the System Over to the User Toth
7. Relay Functions The VISTA 32FB provides a built in Form C relay with contacts rated at 28VAC VDC 2 8 amps max This relay may be programmed for one of the functions below determined by program field 361 e Alarm Activation e Trouble Supervisory Activation e 4 Wire Smoke Detector Reset e Battery Saver These options are described below Alarm Activation 3 61 1 or 4 Steady activation in response to an alarm on one some or all zones as selected in Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide If 3 61 1 the auxiliary relay remains active until Aux Relay Timeout expires or until User Code OFF is entered This option can be used to provide a third unsupervised bell output for Supplementary strobes sounders etc when wired to the Aux Power 1 output or toa separate power supply as shown in Figure 15 1 If field 3 61 4 the auxiliary relay remains activated until User Code 67 is entered This option can be used for elevator recall or ventilator shutdown on fire alarms By default the relay is set to activate on alarm zones 1 8 with no timeout field 3 61 1 This usage might be required for a common fire and burglary alarm strobe indicator When field 3 61 1 the auxiliary relay can also be programmed to give a brief activation for confirmation of arming field 3 57 or for entry exit or perimeter zone faults while Chime Mode is active field 359 lt ALARM AUX RELAY 7 3
8. ceeeeeeeeeeeees 23 12 RINO COUNTE 22 adsense ps eters etre bres hte tha e 26 2 RING DETECTION COUNT araraceronintndneana 23 6 RINGER EQUIVALENCE mureta a C 1 PR BEX JACK uharan a a a 10 2 SN edUlN Oian a a aO 1 5 24 1 Scheduling COMMANAS ss ssesssrrrersesssrnrrrreessrrrrenne B 2 Scheduling Menu MOde cccccccssesssseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeees 24 6 Scheduling Menu Structure esssssssssssessrrrrrreessrrrrrnne 24 7 SECONDARY FORMAT ite iakiGinn ends 23 6 SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER eseese 23 4 SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT F n 23 10 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM O FF n 23 14 Serial Number DeviceS sssssrsrrrressrrrrrrreessrnrreree 7 2 SEN al DEINE karenna a a 18 3 SE SC OA aE TA C 1 S6scoa RadiONi OS aeaii neniani a elav doen 25 1 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT seess 23 7 Setting Up a Partitioned System cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Setup of the 4281 5881 RF Receivers eseese 3 3 SPCCIT CAE OMS snena aana EAS C 1 Speed Key D MACIrOS cccccccceesssssssseeeeeeseseaaseeeees 29 5 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY 23 7 Supervised Fire Without Verification Type 09 21 2 SUDEF VISEG R Fvicstersrasnabcsenecawarsonhanosscpriutenlevessaelanaethote 8 5 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA TRIGGER TP Gir Saa se tenuactien 23 17 Supervisory Messages ccseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeessaeaeeeeeess 30 4 SUPERVISORY ON OPEN amp SHORT eenn 23 18 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND 23 14 SWINGER SUPPRESSION c cccccces
9. 10MA RED Figure 12 2 Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring An optional UL Listed remote keyswitch such as the ADEMCO 4146 can be used for remote arming disarming of the burglary portion of the system and for remotely silencing alarms If used the following must be programmed 12 2 Section 12 J 2 Trigge Outputs 1 Field 15 to assign the keyswitch to a partition 1 2 or 9 to silence fire bell if fire alarm occurs enter Oto disable 2 Zone 7 must be assigned a non zero response type Field 3 20 must be set to 1 when using J 2 OUT 1 and 5 to operate keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs if keyswitch provides LEDs 4 40 to enable Open Close report for keyswitch Wire the keyswitch as shown in Figure 12 3 The tamper switch need not be used for fire or UL Household Burglary installations For UL Commercial Burglary installations the tamper switch must be wired to zone 8 and zone 8 must be programmed for Day Trouble Night Alarm zone type 5 When the keyswitch is removed from the wall the tamper switch will open causing an alarm or trouble on zone 8 and causing the control to disable keyswitch operation until the associated partition is disarmed from a keypad BROKEN LINES REPRESENT INSTALLER WIRING CONNECTIONS ARMED READY GREEN TO OUT 1 J2 PIN 7 TO GND J2 PIN 8 TO OUT 5 J2 PIN 6 TO ZONE 8 TERM 27 TO ZONE 7 ZONE 8 TERM 26 lt 4 TO ZONE 7 TERM
10. After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press O until the TIMED EVENTS prompt appears Timed Events Enter 1 to program timed events 1Yes O No 0 TIMED EVENT Enter the timed event number to be programmed 01 20 01 20 00 Quit 01 Press x The system will then prompt the user to enter the desired action to be taken Enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the QUIT prompt 24 13 01 ACTION none 00 Action Codes 01 Relay On 02 Relay Off 03 R elay Close for 2 seconds 04 Relay Close XX minutes 05 Relay Close YY seconds Action Codes O6 R elay Group On 07 Relay Group Off O8 R elay Group Close for 2 seconds O9 R elay Group Close XX minutes 10 Relay Group Close YY seconds Action Codes 20 Arm STAY 21 Arm AWAY 22 Disarm 23 gt orce Arm STAY 24 orce Arm AWAY 40 nable Open Window by part 41 nable Close Window by part Action Codes 30 Auto bypass Zone list 31 Auto unbypass Zone list Action Codes 42 nable Access Window for Access group s VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Enter the action code for this timed event number from the list at the left This could be an output command an arming command or any other time driven event Press to accept the entry The prompt for the action specifier will display Actions 01 05 If actions 01 05 were selected the prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the re
11. MACHINE MAIN i PBE ce al JACK CONTROL eee one eS CORD gt 4285 4286 VIP MODULE I I I I 4285 4286 TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS OL GRAY i 1 TIP l VIP MODULE g BROWN l2 RING PHONE INPUT RED a 1 3 TIP NOT INSTALLER 4 RING J PHONE OUTPUT A ADJUSTABLE 5 NC I I I I 6 AUDIO OUT 1 FOR FUTURE USE NOT USED YELLOW TO DATA OUT term 14 TO CONTROL CONNECTOR Coe a PANEL WITH FLYING RED TO AUX term 11 TERMINALS LEADS aa USED FOR BLACK TO AUX GROUND term 12 GREEN TO DATA IN term 13 KEYPAD CONNECTIONS Figure 10 1 4285 4286 VIP Module Connections 1 Make all connections exactly as shown in Figure 10 1 This is essential even if the system is not connected to a central station The 4285 4286 will not function if this is not done If the leads on the cable are too short to reach their assigned terminals splice additional wires to them as required 2 If touch tones are not present following phone access to the security system via an on premises phone try reversing the wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the 4285 4286 If the phone plug is disconnected from the control the premises phones will not operate 10 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 10 4 SECTION 11 Audio Alarm Verification AAV Unit In This Section General Information AAV Module Operation Audio Alarm Verification Mo
12. No action specifier is required for this action as the conditions for which this will occur are system wide Enter the time window number 01 20 for which this timed event is to occur As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the time window number will be displayed Press to accept entry Enter the activation time from 1 4 listed below As the number IS keyed in the activation time will be displayed The choices are 1 Trigger at the start of the window 2 Trigger at the end of the window 3 Take effect only for the duration of the window 4 Trigger at both the start and the end of the window Example coffee break buzzer Press to accept entry The system will then ask for which days the event is to be activated Press Oto toggle all days on or off or else press keys 1 8 to toggle the letter x under the day on or off Monday 1 holiday H or 8 When all entries have been made the TIMED EVENT prompt IS displayed again Repeat the procedure for each timed event required for the installation Enter Oat the QUIT prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode 24 15 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Limitation of Access Schedules Limitation of Access is a means by which a user s access code is limited to working during a certain period of time The system provides 8 Access Schedules each
13. Section 28 User Access Codes TMaster or Manager Code can be used instead of Installer Code If used instead of an Installer Code it must havea higher level of authority than the code being changed For example a Master Code can add a Manager or Operator level Code but cannot add another Master Code a Manager Code can add an Operator level Code but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code Keypad will prompt for the authority level for this user User Number 03 Enter the level number as follows Enter Auth Level 1 Master arm disarm bypass add or modify lower level users 2 Manager arm disarm bypass add or modify lower level users 3 Operator Level A arm disarm bypass 4 Operator Level B arm disarm 5 Operator Level C arm disarm only if system armed with this code 6 Duress arm disarm trigger silent panic alarm Keypad will then prompt for Open Close reporting option for this user Open Close Rep Press O NO or 1 YES depending on whether or not 0 NO 1 YES arming disarming by this user will trigger Opening and Closing reports This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a user Access Group If access schedules have been programmed this prompt Enter 0 8 appears Enter the user s access group number 1 8 if this user should have limited access to the system Enter 0 if no access group should be assigned RF Button If a 5800 Series button transmitter has b
14. appropriate PTA Yuasanpete 12 AH Yuasa NP12 12 Fits in VISTA ULKT enclosure only 14 AH Yuasa NP7 12 connect 2 in parallel 17 2 AH Yuasa NP18 12 Fits in VISTA ULKT enclosure only battery 24 AH Yuasa NP12 12 connect 2in Fitsin VISTA ULKT enclosure only parallel Yuasa NP7 12 connect 4 in Fits in VISTA ULKT enclosure only parallel Connecting 4 NP 7 12 batteries in parallel requires a second optional SA 5140 1 dual battery harness 34 44 AH Yuasa NP18 12 connect 2in Fitsin VISTA ULKT enclosure only parallel Making the Battery Connections 1 Usethe battery capacity calculation worksheet above to determine the appropriate battery for the installation Do not connect the batteries until all devices have been wired to the control 2 Apply AC power tothe control panel and after a few seconds the keypad should display Disarmed Ready To Arm Verify that the AC transformer is supplying proper voltage to the AC input terminals should be 17 19 5VAC when the power line is 110 120VAC Also verify that the battery float charging voltage is correct should be 13 5 13 8 VDC with no battery or fully charged battery connected If not check the power line voltage and check that the aux power 1 aux power 2 and polling loop terminals are not loaded in excess of their ratings 3 If two batteries are required connect them in parallel using the dual battery harness Both batteries should be mounted as s
15. e This option is set in partition specific program field 2x08 Auto Disarming e Thesystem can automatically disarm a partition at the end of a pre determined opening disarm time window e Thedisarming time can be delayed by using the auto disarm delay feature Disarm Delay e Auto disarm delay provides a delay before auto disarming This delay is added to the end of the disarm time window e The delay is set in 4 minute increments up to 56 minutes in partition specific program field 2x07 Restrict Disarming e This option allows disarming by users only during the disarm time window and during the arming time window in case user needs to re enter premises after manually arming the partition e This option is set in partition specific field 2 10 Section 24 Scheduling Options e 6 f field 210 is set it is highly recommended to set field 2x11 as well This field allows the partition to be disarmed outside the arm disarm time windows only if the partition is in alarm Exception Reports e This option allows the reporting of openings and closings to the central station only if the arming and disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening and closing time windows e This option is set in partition specific field 2 09 e The system can be programmed to send No Opening and No Closing reports if the partition is not armed or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time window Time Driven Events e By using the
16. 48 49 50 Section 25 System Communication COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT x94 80 Primary Format o ADEMCO Low Speed 51 Low Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO Low Speed nae Secondary F ormat 0 ADEMCO Low Speed 53 Low Speed Format Sec o o ol Primary ADEMCO Low Speed Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection 0 Radionics 0 no Standard E xpanded Reporting for Primary o o o o o ol Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat Standard E xpanded Reporting for Secondary o o o o o ol Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat Dual Reporting standard Alarm Rstr standard Alarm Rstr Bypass COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT 94 81 Primary Format ADEMCO Express 51 Low Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO Express e Secondary F ormat ADEMCO Express 53 Low Speed Format Sec o o ol Primary ADEMCO Express Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection 0 Radionics Dual Reporting 0 no Standard E xpanded Reporting for Primary o o o o o ol Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat Standard E xpanded Reporting for Secondary o o o o o ol Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat standard Alarm Rstr standard Alarm Rstr Bypass COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO HIGH SPEED FORMAT 94 82 Primary Format ADEMCO High Speed 51 Low Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO High Speed 32 Secondar
17. In This Section Relay Basics Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Raday Modules Relay Basics Relays used in conjunction with this control panel are programmable switches that can be used to perform many different functions They can be used to turn lights on and off control sounders and doors or for status indications In this system each device must be programmed as to how to act ACTION when to activate START and when to deactivate STOP Each of these is described in Raday Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide This control supports up to four 4204 or eight 4204CF Relay Modules Each 4204 Module provides 4 relays with Form C normally open and normally closed contacts This means you can program up to 16 relays to activate and de activate as desired Each 4204CF Module adds two additional style Y supervised bell outputs to the system If 4204CF Modules are used only relays 1 and 3 on each module can be programmed The other 2 relays relays 2 and 4 on each module are used for Supervision purposes This section is used to program relays to activate in response to a programmed condition i e an alarm fault of a zone etc The system can also be programmed to activate relays at specific times of day by using the 80 Scheduling Menu Mode Time Driven Events function Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules 1 Set the 4204 or 4204CF s DIP switches for a device address between 01 and 15 that
18. Programming the Control for the Pager 4100APG LED Indications General Information Whenever an event occurs on the VISTA 32F B a message can be sent toa pager Thisis accomplished by using the 4100APG Pager Interface The 4L00APG will dial and send the information to a paging service It will transmit to the pager any message programmed to be sent to the event log printer even if the printer is not being used The types of messages are divided into 6 categories Alarms Troubles Bypasses Opens Closes System and Test The VISTA 32FB can be programmed so each type of message transmits to a different pager Each type has its own programming field for the pager phone number and pager ID Of course these could be sent to the same pager by programming those fields with the same pager phone number and ID The 4100APG will hang up between each message Multiple messages will be sent in the order received If the 4100APG cannot make contact with the paging service it will retry up to 10 times If the interface loses contact with the VISTA 32FB it will send a message to the paging service to notify the user The pager interface must be wired to a different phone line than the VISTA 32FB itself Otherwise the communication of both will not function properly Mounting the 4100APG The 4100APG may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or if this is not possible on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it Pry off the pa
19. The system automatically issues a smoke detector power reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these zones to allow faulted detectors to be reset To end the test enter any security code and press OFF An End of Walk Test message will be sent to the central station if programmed Note that the test will automatically end if no faults are detected within a 60 minute time period Burglary Walk Test Code TEST 5 This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in response to faults on burglary and non fire related 24 hour zones for the purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked without triggering alarms Note that the system will not trigger alarms for burglary and non fire related 24 hour zones but will trigger fire alarms while this test is active This test can only be activated by the installer a master user or manager user by entering the corresponding security code and pressing TEST while the burglary portion of the system is disarmed UL requires that this test be conducted on a weekly basis When this test Is first activated the system will sound burglary bells or any bell having a zero response type i e 0 disabled in each bell s supervisory zone for 3 seconds The system will send a Start of Walk Test message to the central station The keypads will display BURG WALK TEST IN PROGRESS and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains active Open and close each protected
20. e Can be individually assigned to either of two partitions e Can be individually assigned to bell outputs and or aux relay VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Wireless Expansion Supports up to 32 wireless zones using 5881 type RF receiver fewer if using hardwire and or polling loop zones Wireless zones have the following characteristics e Supervised by control panel for check in signals except certain nonsupervised transmitters e Tamper protection for 5800 Series supervised transmitters e Can be individually assigned to either of two partitions e Can be individually assigned to bell outputs and or auxiliary relay U L Wireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations For specific information regarding number of wireless zones supported by each RF receiver see Section 8 Wireless Zone Expansion System Zones Provides zones for supervision of all peripheral devices keypads RF receivers and relay modules and individual relays as well as system zones bells dialers telephone lines earth ground keypad panics etc Zone assignments are as follows Individual Relay Zones 601 616 Peripheral Device Zones 800 830 See Section 22 Zonelndex Zone Type Defaults section for a full explanation of these zones and specific zone assignments Maintenance Signal Support The control monitors maintenance signals from certain smoke detectors 5808 4192CPM 5192SD Maintenance
21. field 27 UL requires that a test report be transmitted at least once every 24 hours The VISTA 32FB can be programmed to send the first report at any time of the day or on any day of the week after power up field 83 30 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Fire Drill Test code 69 This test causes fire bells or any bell having a non zero response type in the 93 Menu Mode to be activated in either steady or pulsing manner as programmed in field 3 15 for the purpose of conducting a fire drill or a bell test This test can only be activated by the installer or a master user from Partition 1 keypads by entering the corresponding security code and pressing 69 while the burglary portion of the system Is disarmed Keypads display FIRE DRILL ACTIVE while this test is active Entering any security code and pressing OFF stops the test Note that the system continues to monitor all 24 hour zones fire panic etc while this test is active and will end the test when an alarm condition is detected This test should be conducted at periodic intervals as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction One Man Fire Walk Test code 68 30 2 This test causes the system to sound console beeps and bell dings in response to fire zone faults zone type 9 16 and 17 for the purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked without triggering alarms Note that the system will not be operational as an
22. responses are possible Contains a nonreplaceable battery At the end of the battery s life the entire unit must be replaced If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned toa user code when adding a user 8 6 Section 8 Wirdess Zone Expansion Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters continued 5802M N Miniature Personal UR or RF Has single pushbutton E mergency Transmitter Usually programmed for a response type of 24 Hr Audible or 24 Hr Silent other zone responses are possible If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user Contains a replaceable battery 5804 Wireless Key BR Only Has four pushbuttons each with 5804BD Transmitter a unique input loop code Programmable responses e g Arm Stay Arm Away Disarm etc Contains a replaceable battery If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned toa user code when adding a user 5806 5807 Wireless Photoelectric One piece smoke detectors with 5808 Smoke Detectors built in transmitter 5806 and 5807 UL Listed for residential fire usage only 5808 UL Listed for commercial fire Door Window Transmitter Has one input loop for a built in reed switch used in conjunction with a magnet Door Window RF Has two unique Input loop Transmitter codes one for a wired closed circuit contact loop the other for RF a built in reed switch used in conjuncti
23. the Keypad Will Display a Prompt Answer the Prompted Questions Enter Code Off 1 Enter Code Bypass 6 Zone Number To Automatically Bypass All F aulted Zones Use Quick Bypass Method Enter Code Bypass Enter Code Chime 9 To Turn Chime Mode Off Enter Code Chime Again User Code Partition Number 1 2 User Code 0 x 1 Zone 95 A Key x Zone 99 B Key 3 Zone 96 C Key Press O for 5 Seconds Press for 5 Seconds VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Programming Commands Scheduling Commands Output Device Control B 2 Display User Self Help Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds Site I nitiated Download U ser Code 1 Direct Wire Download Enable User Code 5 Enter Program Mode Installer Code 8 0 O Exit Program Mode 99 or 98 nstaller Programmed Schedule Events Installer Code 80 Temporary Schedule Editing User Code 81 Installer Master Manager Only Extend Closing Window User Code 82 Installer Master Manager Only End User Output Device Programming User Code 83 Activate Output Device as Programmed User Code 71 Activate Output Device as Programmed User Code 72 Activate Output Device Manually User Code 70 APPENDIX C Specifications VISTA 32FB CONTROL Physical Electrical Primary Power Backup Battery Alarm Power A
24. will appear under that day indicating the output for that day is active Entering a day s number again will deactivate that day Pressing O will toggle all days on off The outputs will only bein effect for the days that have the letter x under them As the week progresses the selected days are reset to the inactive state unless the permanent option is selected next screen prompt When completed press to continue Selecting Permanent 1 means that this schedule will bein effect on a continuous basis An answer of O means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only The letter x under the day will then be cleared but all other entries for the output device will remain programmed Press to accept entry The system will quit User Scheduling Mode and return to normal operating mode SECTION 25 System Communication In This Section A Successful Transmission Reporting Formats Loading Communication Defaults A Successful Transmission When a control panel calls the central station receiver it waits to hear a handshake frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on line and ready to receive its message Once the panel hears the handshake it is programmed to listen for it sends its message The panel then waits for a kissoff frequency from the receiver acknowledging that the message was received and understood Once the handshake frequency is received and understood by the pa
25. zone type 7 will trigger Pin 3 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING of Enter Lif no Test report is to be sent if any other type of report was sent since the last Test report Enter Oif Test reports are to be sent at the set intervals regardless of whether or not other reports have been sent Must be O for UL applications TEST REPORT INTERVAL 024 a Enter the Test reporting interval in hours 001 999 Enter 000 if no Test reporting is desired If a Test report is desired enter a test code in Report Code Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide Set first Test report time in field 83 Max 024 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE mf Enter Lif upon power up after a prolonged power loss that caused the system s battery to discharge the system will assume the system status prior to the power loss Enter O if the system is always to power up in a disarmed state When the system powers up armed an alarm will occur three minutes after arming if a zone is faulted When so armed the system reports closing as U ser 0 if Open Close reporting for installer was enabled in field 39 Note that if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY the system may not respond to sensor changes for a small period of time 1 3 min which allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilize Note Must be 1 for UL applications Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to d
26. 1k ohms in alarm provided they maintain a voltage drop of less than 3 8 volts in alarm Programming Hardwired Zones Each zone must be programmed into the system which assigns characteristics that define the way the system responds to faults on that zone Refer to 93 Menu Mode in the Quick Start Guide for instructions on programming hardwired zones Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones 6 6 After installation of all hardwired zones is complete power has been applied to the system and the zones have been programmed each partition of the security system should be checked as follows Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the hardwired zones are not ina faulted state Doors and windows with contacts should be closed PIRs should be covered use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary 1 With all hardwired zones intact the aloha keypads connected to the system should display DISARMED READY TO ARM If the following is displayed instead press the key to display the faulted zone s DISARMED Press x to show faults Restore any faulted zone s as necessary also make sure that a 2000 ohm EOL resistor has been connected across the terminals of unused zones When the DISARMED READY TO ARM message Is displayed proceed to the next step 2 Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone Individually to ensure that it is being monitored by the system Each time a zone is faulted the
27. 2 PARNOU SUG Arat NI De OG ae eee ene ave DAV ccccsssssscsssssssssssesssssssssssssessssseseeesssnssssniissssssseeetsseeee 11 1 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors o AAV Module Operation sssssssssssrressessrrrrrrreessrnrrenee 11 1 2 Wire Smoke Detectors sssssssrereessrrrrrrreesrrrrrrrrese 6 2 AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDIN G 33 2 AC Transformer cccccssscecccsssseeeeeesseeeessesseeeeees 4 4 19 1 Access Gi OUD ceann 28 5 ACESS CONT Olarii aia EEEE ERR 29 3 341 and 441 Expanded Format c scscccsssescessessesseee 25 2 ACCESS CONTROL RELAY essere 23 15 341 and 441 Standard Formats ccccccccccccce 25 2 Access Schedules EREI EE ANA AE E A A AAA 24 7 ACCESS SeCUrIEy uniscono a aa 26 3 ACON GO O 24 11 a ee 34 11 ACIVE UME ceased aninieerdewuasinaemanaknamets 24 13 Bree Fe OMEN aN 25 2 Addressing The K Cypads ccccccccssssssseeseeeeeesseeeeeeeess 5 3 4100APG LED Indications ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 4 Ademco 442 EXPreSS cccccccssssssssceeeessssssseeeeees 20 1 25 1 4100APG Pager I Nterface cccccecccesesssseeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 18 1 ADEM CO 442 EXPRESS wciscecserarecesaaiectieacticernts action C 1 DOS IY sccieeetre erates seinannetignctoue ance nee aamanantrnons atts 12 8 26 1 ADEMCO 4146 cccccccccscssessesssseeeeeeeeeeeeesessssseasseeseees 12 2 4100SM Interface Module cccceeeeeeeesesssseeeeeeeeeeeas 12 1 PAGNCO AB IZ rsisi ae a ni 4 2 4100SM Serial I nterface MOdule ceee
28. 23 ForceArm STAY Auto bypass faulted zns Partition s 24 ForceArm AWAY Auto bypass faulted zns Partition s The auto arm warning field 2 06 applies when using time driven events to auto arm Temporary schedules will not override an auto arming or auto disarming programmed in time driven events The auto arming window cannot be extended using the Installer Code 82 Mode Bypass Commands Activation times 1 Beginning 2 End 3 During are the only valid choices for bypass commands If 3 During is selected for auto bypassing the system will bypass the zone s specified on a particular zone list at the beginning of the window and unbypass the zone s at the end of the window If it is selected for auto unbypassing the system will remove the bypass of the zone s at the beginning of the window and will restore the bypass of the zone s at the end of the window Action Code Action Specifier 30 Auto bypass Zone list Zone list 31 Auto unbypass Zone list Zone list Open Close Windows Activation time 3 During is the only valid choice for these commands Action Code Action Specifier 40 Enable Opening Window by partition Partition s 41 Enable Closing Window by partition Partition s 42 Enable Access Window for access group Access Group 50 Off Normal Reminder None Starts local keypad beeping if fire off normal condition exists Section 24 Scheduling Options 3 Enter the desired activation time which refers t
29. 25 4146 KEYSWITCH Figure 12 3 Remote Keyswitch Wiring Keyswitch Operation UL The VISTA 32FB allows two modes of keyswitch operation When field 15 is set toa partition 1 2 the keyswitch operates as follows With System Disarmed and No Alarms Present A momentary short across zone 7 will arm the partition in the AWAY mode and a short held for more than 10 seconds will arm the partition in the STAY mode A subsequent short will disarm the partition The keyswitch LEDs will indicate that the partition has armed see table below Faulted zones must either be corrected or bypassed before the system will arm In commercial fire installations mount the keyswitch next to a keypad The keypad will display the UL required FIRE BELL SILENCED indication when the keyswitch is used to silence a fire alarm 12 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide With Alarms Present A momentary short across zone 7 will silence alarm bell and keypad sounds and will disarm the partition if it was armed The keyswitch LEDs provide a memory of alarm indication see table below A subsequent short across zone 7 will clear the alarm memory indication and reset 2 wire smoke and glassbreak detectors if used When field 15 is set to 9 the keyswitch operates as follows A momentary short across zone 7 will silence alarm bell sounds i e turn off Bell 1 Bell 2 and the auxiliary relay if programmed for alarms
30. Access Grant Duress Egress Grant Perimeter Burglary Interior Burglary 24 Hour Burglary 135 Day Night Burglary 142 150 24 Hour Auxiliary 200 301 302 305 306 308 309 310 313 321 322 332 333 344 351 352 373 Fire Supervisory AC Loss Low System Battery System Reset Program Tamper System Shutdown Battery Test Fail Ground Fault System Engineer Reset Bell 1 Trouble Bell 2 Trouble Poll Loop Short Trouble Expansion Module Failure RF Jam Main Dialer Trouble Backup Dialer Trouble Fire Loop Trouble 374 Exit Error by Zone Trouble global 381 Loss of Supervision RF 382 383 384 385 386 389 401 403 Loss of RPM Supervision RPM Sensor Tamper RF Transmitter Low Battery High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal Detector Self Test Failed O C by User Power Up Armed Auto Arm Cancel by User Remote Arm Disarm Download Quick Arm Keyswitch O C 407 408 25 6 Code 411 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 54 Definition Main Backup Dialer Bypass Bypass ACS Zone Shunt ACS Point Bypass Communicator Test Fire Test Listen in to Follow 441 451 452 453 4 455 457 459 501 520 521 522 524 551 570 576 577 602 607 608 611 612 621 622 623 624 625 631 632 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 46 47 48 49 50 45 46 47
31. Battery and Communicator Test reports Field 27 must be set to 024 or less so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours e If using the 7720 connect it to the VISTA 32FB burglary audible panic alarm trigger For Grade AA Service e You must usea 7920SE Long Range Radio e Connect the 7920SE tothe VISTA 32FB burglary audible panic alarm trigger UL611 UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm Follow the instructions for U L609 local installations given above For Grade A Service e You must use the VISTA 32F Bs dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio e Connect the control s burglary audible panic alarm trigger on J 2 header to the 7720 Program a 24 hour trouble response for Zone 974 to enable main dialer Supervision The VISTA 32FB will activate the burglary audible panic trigger when a corresponding alarm is detected and will activate the trouble trigger when a main dialer fault is detected e Also connect the 7720s radio fault output to one of the VISTA 32F Bs EOLR supervised zones i e 1 8 Program this zone for a trouble by day alarm by night type 05 or a 24 hour alarm type 07 08 response to radio faults Appendix A Regulatory Agency Statenents e Program the control s dialer to send Burglary Alarm Trouble Opening Closing and Low Battery reports For Grade AA Service e Follow the instructions for Grade A service except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720 California State Fire Marshal CSFM Requi
32. Disarmed Arms No Change User 1 Arms Armed No Change Notice that in sequence 1 since Office 2 was the last to arm the lobby also armed Office 2 S programmed to affect and arm the lobby In sequence 2 the lobby could not arm when Office 2 armed because Office 1 which affects the lobby was still disarmed When Office 1 armed the lobby still did not arm because Office 1 was not programmed to arm the lobby User 1 would have to arm the lobby manually Therefore it would be desirable to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building Do not assign Partition 1 as the common lobby All fire zones should be assigned to this partition to ensure that all fire test modes operate correctly How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby Codes with Global Arming If a code is given global arming when it is defined See Section 29 User Access Codes the keypad will ask ARM ALL or DISARM ALL whenever the user tries to arm or disarm the partitions he she has access to from an alpha keypad This allows the user to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed and so eliminates the automatic operation of the lobby Keep in mind however that if the user attempts to arm all and another affecting partition is disarmed the lobby cannot be armed and the message UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION will be displayed Codes with Non Global Arming If arming wit
33. For example User 3 the VP of Engineering could be assigned to work within the Engineering Department Partition 1 of ABC Manufacturing Since the full capabilities in the area are required User 3 is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1 authority This means User 3 may arm disarm bypass add or modify users in Partition 1 User 3 must also be able to gain access to the manufacturing area Partition 2 on an emergency basis This can be easily set up with the partitioned system by requesting that User 3 also be assigned to Partition 2 with a level of authority set lower such as Level 4 OPERATOR Level B which allows the user to arm and disarm but nothing else The control will automatically assign User 3 the same user number within Partition 2 and does not require reprogramming of the already existing 4 digit security code EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS In the above example User 3 has MASTER authority in Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition 2 The user number is the same for both partitions Note that if a user number is already being used in a partition the system will automatically assign a new user an unused number To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Code During user code entry normal key depressions at other keypads in a partition will be ignored However panic key depression will cause an alarm and terminate user entry Enter Installer Code t 8 new user 02 75 new user s code 28 4
34. Heat Detector Recess mount Vplex Serial ID Contact 4939SN WH 4939SN BR 4939SN GY Surface mount Vplex Serial ID Contact Mini Recess mount Vplex Serial 1D Contact Mini Surface mount Vplex Serial ID Contact Aluminum Overhead Door Contact Single Technology Glassbreak Detector Dual Technology Glassbreak Detector Extender Module Low profile One piece photoelectric smoke detector with built in Vplex communication circuitry Low profile One piece photoelectric smoke detector with built in heat detector 135 F 57 C and Vplex communication circuitry Recessed 2 dia contact with built in Vplex communication circuitry Serial ID number preprogrammed no Special programmer required Compact surface mount Vplex Serial ID contact Serial ID number preprogrammed no Special programmer required Smallest recess mounted Vplex in family 3 8 dia Serial ID number preprogrammed no Special programmer required Smallest surface mounted Vplex in family Serial ID number preprogrammed no Special programmer required 24 inch armored cable Serial Number ID preprogrammed by control panel Glassbreak detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable Dual technology glassbreak detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable Used to increase the polling loop current 128mA to extend the polling loop wire run length and or to provide individual electrically isolated loops C
35. IF THIS OCCURS FIRST VERIFY THAT PIN 1 CHASSIS GROUND IS ISOLATED FROM PIN 7 SIGNAL GROUND ON THE 4100SM S RS232 CONNECTOR EARLIER PRODUCTION VERSIONS OF THE USE GENDER CHANGER SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM IF PRINTER HAS DB25 4100SM JUMPERS PPLIED CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING WITH 4100SM 4100SM ADT HAVE AN UNMARKED 3 8 LONG BARE MALE CONNECTOR ___ WIRE JUMPER LYING NEAR THE PIN 1 SIDE OF THE COLOR FUNCTION Ny C RS232 CONNECTOR WHICH MUST BE CUT TO ISOLATE ne THESE PINS THEN VERIFY THAT THESE PINS ARE U CTS 5 SERIAL PRINTER ISOLATED ON YOUR PRINTER S RS232 CONNECTOR WHITE DSR 6 SET FOR 8 DATA BITS FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED WITH YOUR NO PARITY PRINTER TO ISOLATE THESE PINS IF REQUIRED 1 STOP BIT 300 1200 BAUD HARDWARE HANDSHAKE USING DTR SIGNAL Figure 17 1 Event Log Printer Connections The printer must be configured as follows e 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit e 300 or 1200 baud 1200 required if alphanumeric pager interface is installed e Hardware handshaking using DTR signal The 4100SM Module is supplied with a 10 foot RS232 cable A longer cable or an extension cable can be used if the VISTA 32FB and serial printer are separated by more than 10 feet but the total cable length should be less than 50 feet The 4100SM Module must be connected to the panel using the distance of the trigger cable The wires cannot be lengthened to mount the module in a remote locatio
36. If the system is in Print Mode the first time 8 is pressed the printer will print all events in that category with each event automatically scrolled on the display keypad The following is a typical display P2 01 01 12 02A Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of Partition 2 at BURGLARY 003 12 02AM on J anuary 1 After the last event in the selected category has been displayed using either the 1 or 3 key the following will appear for a few seconds END OF EVENT LOG TYPE CCC UUU Section 17 Event Log Options CLEAR EVENT LOG Press Lif Event Log Clear function is to be performed Clearing 0 NO 1 YES the event log does not erase any events from the system memory All events in the log will still be displayed if the COMPLETE option is selected Only those events occurring from the time of the CLEAR command will be displayed if RECENT display option is selected Press 0 if event log is not to be cleared at this time If Lis pressed the following will appear ARE YOU SURE Press 1 to clear the event log The event log will not be cleared 0 NO 1 YES if Ois pressed SCREEN DEFINITIONS RECENT Events since last CLEAR COMPLETE Displays all events TYPE Type of event burg fire etc CCC Zone contact number UUU User number 17 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 17 6 SECTION 178 4100APG Pager Interface In This Section General Information Mounting the 4100APG Wiring the 4100APG
37. KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT 23 14 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT 23 13 Wireless System COMMands 0 ccccceeesesseeeeeeeeeeeneas B 1 Wireless Zone EXPANSION ccseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 8 1 Wiripg BelOuytp tS rast areia naa naa 14 2 Wiring Devices to Zones 1 8 sssssssrresessrrrrrrreesrren 6 1 Wiring the 4100APG sssssssssssrsssessrrrrrrressrrrrrrressrnnn 18 2 Wiring the Long Range Radio ccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeees 13 2 Wiring the VIP Module ceeeeceeesssssssseeeeeeeeseaeees 10 2 Wiring TO The KeYpads cccccseseeceeeeeesseeeseeeeeeseaeeees 5 1 Wiring Addressing RPM De VICES csseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 2 glu tc Io s Peer ener E E a eur nr ane corer 19 6 ZN TYPE Le DELAY USE piiki 23 18 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION 23 14 ZONE 6 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE 23 18 Zone 6 Alternate Tamper FUNCTION ccccccseeseeeeeees 4 2 Zone 6 Tamper Configuration cccccssssseeeeesseeeseeeeees 6 4 LONG SOA E EE E E E E ean ean A 10 1 Zone OID aan a N 12 1 Zone NGSX diseara e 22 1 ZOMG NOU USEd i mn a 21 1 Zone Type DefaultS ssssssssesssrrrrrressrnrrressrrrrrrreesnns 22 2 ZONE Type DefinitionS ss ssssssssrsrrressrrrrrrresrnrrrressn 21 1 ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES FOR ZONE TYPES IO IO ae corer cre Thre eer crrercecr ee 23 19 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9 10 23 9 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1 8 23 9 ZONES is settee ces ewan a utace 2
38. Note If field 3 19 is not set to 1 the printer will not operate 1 73 PRINTER BAUD RATE 0 Enter Oif printer is set for 1200 baud preferred Enter Lif printer is set for 300 baud Note Must be 1200 if using the alphanumeric pager interface 174 RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES ooo Enter the relay timeout 000 127 in multiples of 2 minutes desired for 80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers 04 09 and Relay Programming output command 56 refer to the Quick Start Guide and Section 24 Scheduling Options in this manual 175 RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS poo Enter the relay timeout 000 127 seconds desired for 80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers 05 10 and Raday Programming output command 57 refer to the Quick Start Guide and see Section 24 Scheduling Options in this manual 176 ACCESS RELAY partition specific pof The system can be programmed to provide user activated access control If enabled the assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user enters his code and presses 0 Enter the relay number 01 16 for the relay that will be used for access control Enter 00 if not used in this partition This function has not been UL Listed for use with the VISTA 32FB control Must be 00 for commercial fire and UL 1 77 LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL 0 Enter O for no logging Enter 1 to log first maintenance signal from each smoke detector 2x00 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS mf E nter
39. Panic Keys There are three panic key pairs shown below that if programmed can be used to manually initiate alarms and send a report to the central station Each key pair can be individually programmed for 24 Hour Silent Audible or Auxiliary Emergency responses as well as Fire The panic function is activated when the appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time The panic functions are identified by the system as follows PANIC Displayed as Zone 1 995 For alpha keypads these panic keys 43 996 can also be programmed with an alpha descriptor 999 For the panic functions to be of practical value the system must be connected to a central station Speed Key D Macros The system supports up to 32 Speed Key macro commands A Speed Key command is a series of keystrokes stored in the system memory and activated when a programmed lettered key is pressed Each Speed Key command can include 32 keystrokes Typical Speed K ey functions include e Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming e Seldom used but repeatable sequences e Relay activation sequences Lettered keys A B C can be assigned a specific Speed Key function by entering a Speed Key number 1 32 in field 126 Programming Speed Key Sequence To program a macro enter your User Code D The following appears ENTER SPEED KEY 01 32 00 QUIT Enter the 2 digit Soeed Key number 01 32 being defined and press Ent
40. REMAINING KNOCK OUT WIRES THRU HERE CARRIAGE BOLT HEX NUT AND Pec WAC EA _ CABINET SIDEWALL OUTSIDE Figure 4 2 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations 4 2 Section 4 Installing The Control Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing e Follow the instructions given above for Mercantile Premises listing e The back of the panel s box must have pry off tamper supervision Mount an ADEMCO No 112 Tamper Switch not supplied with the VISTA ULKT enclosure kit into the hole provided in the back of the panel box This switch must be wired to zone 6 This switch has contacts that are closed while the switch is depressed Installing the Control s Circuit Board Refer to Figure 4 3 when mounting the PC board e Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs Make sure the clip orientation is exactly as shown in the diagram to avoid damage to the clip when the mounting screws are tightened This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board e Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet Make certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated e Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the cabinet with the accompanying screws Make certain that the mounting screws are tight This ensures that there is a good ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet Also dress field wiring away from the microprocessor center
41. Sniffer Mode effectively disables RF point reception Sniffer Mode cannot be entered while any partition is armed 8 4 Section 8 Wirdess Zone Expansion 5800 Series Transmitter Setup 5800 Series transmitters have built in serial numbers that must be enrolled by the system using 93 Menu Mode Programming refer to the Quick Start Guide or input to the control via the downloader 5800 Series transmitters except 5827 described separately do not have DIP switches Each transmitter s zone number is programmed into the system in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide Some transmitters such as the 5816 and 5817 can support more than one zone referred to as loops or inputs On the 5816 for example the wire connection terminal block is loop 1 the reed contact is loop 2 Each loop must be assigned a different zone number For button type transmitters wireless keys such as the 5804 5804BD 5803 and 5801 a unique zone number must be assigned to each individual button used on the transmitter Each button on the transmitter also has a pre designated loop or input number that is automatically displayed when enrolled Transmitter Supervision Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises 5802 5802CP 5803 5804 5808B D 5827 and 5827BD each transmitter is supervised by a check in signal that is sent to the receiver at 70 90 minute intervals If at least one check in is not received from each supervised
42. Total Current on Aux Power 2 output calculate standby and alarm currents then add to get Aux Power 2 current subtotal Device Model Device Current X of Units Standby Alarm Aux Power 2 Output Subtotal connector J 4 pin 5 400mA max 400mA max 3 Enter devices BELL 1OUTPUT Total Current connected to Bell 1 output calculate alarm currents then add to get Bell 1 output current subtotal Device Model Device Current X of Units Standby Alarm 4 Enter devices BELL 2 OUTPUT Total Current connected to Bell 2 output calculate alarm currents then add to get Bell 2 output current subtotal Device Model Device Current X ofUnits Standby Alarm o f few o f few 000 o f ew o f ew a a a a a a Ball zOutput Subtotal terrinas 5 amp 9 17 amp ra VOR ___ 5 Enter the total Samat Total Current i olling Loop ee Standby Alarm Sane in the Enter worksheet total both standby amp alarm columns Se eae Polling Loop Subtotal 19 4 Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure 6 Enter total Total Current calculated subtotals C OMBINED AUX ROWER BELL ANDIRELAY OUTPUT ii i n rm of all listed outputs y then add to get the Aux Power 1 Output Subtotal ft combined current Aux Power 2 Output Subtotal Bell 1 Output Subtotal XXXXXX _ Bell 2 Output Subtotal XXXXXX a Add all subtotals Cannot exceed 1 0A max standby 2 3A max alarm 7 These values are Total Current fixed
43. VISTA 32FB PCB CURRENT Standby Alarm Includes 2 wire smoke detector loading on zones 1 amp 2 and 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module 5mA 15mA inactive inactive 5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active However since VISTA 32FB PCB current includes built in main dialer current and since main dialer is inactive when 5140DLM is active 5140DLM imposes only 15mA added current on power Supply 8 Enter the calculated Total Current combined current TOTAL CONTROL PANEL LOAD eat Al then add to total asec See PCB current Combined aux power bell and polling loop total a Ps 9 Using the total Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet O tS g Capacity Formula Calc Value supply load step 8 Standby Capacity Use total standby load from previous worksheet calculate the For 4 hour standby time use the following formula battery capacity Total standby load x 4 hours x 1 4 loading contingency required for the Fackor installation For 24 hour or 60 hour standby time use the following formula Total standby load x 24 or 60 hours x 1 1 contingency factor Alarm Capacity Use total alarm load from previous worksheet Total alarm load x 0 083 hours for 5 min alarm x 0 250 hours for 15 min alarm Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities i 19 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 10 Usingthebattery Battery Selection Table capacity value from Recommended Battery step 9 select the TAE 7 TEC
44. accounts 26 2 Section 26 Downloading Primer e Leavea message for the customer e Command the system to upload a copy of its resident program to the office e Read arming status AC power status list of faulted zones list of bypassed zones 224 event log list of zones currently in alarm list of zones currently in trouble and ECP equipment list e Set the real time clock Access Security Accessing the control from a remote location is protected against compromise by the use of four levels of protection 1 Security code handshake The subscriber s account number as well as an 8 digit ID number known only to the office must be matched between the control and computer 2 Hang up and Callback The control panel will hang up and call the computer back at the pre programmed number only if the security codes match 3 Data encryption All data that is exchanged between the computer and control is encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone tapping the line and corrupting data 4 Operator access levels Operators may be assigned various levels of access to the downloader each having its own log on code The access levels allow the operators read write capabilities of the customers account information For a detailed explanation of the access levels see the downloading software User M anual NOTES e Each time the control panel is accessed successfully a Callback Requested report is sent to the central station if
45. addition we recommend that radio backup be used in a security system so that alarm signals can still be sent to the alarm monitoring station in the event that the telephone lines are out of order alarm signals are normally sent over the phone lines if connected to an alarm monitoring station Table of Contents Recommendations for Proper Protection ccscesccccccssssececccseseeecceceeseeeeeeeueueeeeecesseaecesesseauecesessaaseeeaaeesesesaeaeeeeess II How LOUSe EAS OM Ua stsescreneneratecnnccneneraisanienscs A A Mn a EE IX Conventions Used in This Manual cccccssssececccessseceeceeesseeeeceeuseeeeceeeuseceeeesauseceeeeeagaeceseesagaeeeessaeeessseaseeesssaagass x Section 1 General DESC DEON wassivtetnsssevedancsstsdanndnasdtndvcedsasaevncensasuvinuwsnisiaauienndsiniviessusiuwedaniantevataniennasdsiniaiias 1 1 E ae E S E ae E E O A E able ume tear ane ion E ue eer eae l 1 Dealg a AA ade EAE N AA AEAT E tbe E T AA T E maie oeeeiteees 1 1 Section 2 Planning a Partitioned System sssssssssssscssssssseeesnnsseeesnnesseseenesseeeennassseesnnesseseenesssssenssessaaess 2 1 TACORY OF IP ATE OM A i A E REEE E AEEA E IE ianhas dae E Ra AAEREN 2 1 Setting Up a Partitioned Syste 45 cisesseeanancvcms iecuveonmeeayaunaveeignameninaahinertyoauiauyeanteaesveienaeriredeimaieosnnaaearoarediaes 2 2 COMMON EOOD EOJ C ereer S ouaatapisbaeeinenmanrenion 2 2 Master Keypad Setup and Operation cccccsssscccccessseceecceesseceeecsesece
46. applies to any hardwired or polling loop fire zone set to zone type 16 For 4 wire smoke detectors the power must be interrupted by the system s auxiliary relay field 3 61 2 The control panel will verify any alarm by resetting the smoke detectors after the first alarm trigger and then waiting 90 seconds for a second alarm trigger If the smoke detector or thermostat does not trigger again the control will disregard the first trigger and no alarm signal will occur This feature eliminates false alarms due to electrical or physical transients Zone 6 Tamper Configuration 6 4 Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the VISTA 32F B Cabinet Door Tamper Switch and for the ADEMCO AB12 GradeA Burglary Bell Box Tamper Switches and Tamper Liner Assign zone 6 toa burglary partition Program it for day trouble night alarm zone type 5 when only one burglary partition is used Program it for 24 hr audible alarm zone type 7 Section 6 Basic Hardwired Zones when more than one burglary partition is used Enable the Zone 6 Alternate Tamper Function program field 3 17 When set in this manner the zone will trigger a trouble when the panel is disarmed and an alarm when the panel is armed when the zone senses either an open or a short or when an earth ground fault caused by drilling through the AB12 housing is detected See Section 14 External Sounders for information on AB12 bell wiring Wiring 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zon
47. be used Enter 00 to disable ring detection Enter 01 14 for ring counts of 1 14 Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat Mode which allows the system to receive calls even when a telephone answering machine is connected to the same phone line In the Answering Machine Mode the caller should let the phone ring once then hang up and call again within 30 seconds The system upon hearing one ring followed by nothing will not answer the first call but will ready itself to pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30 seconds i e the downloader calling again Must be 00 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations Note Do not enter 00 if a 4285 4286 is installed PRIMARY FORMAT 0 This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone number Enter the appropriate number for the primary format as follows 0 ow Speed 1 Contact I D 2 ADE MCO High Speed 3 gt A4DEMCO Express LOW SPEED FORMAT PRIMARY 0 Enter the appropriate value 0 ADE M CO Low Speed 1 Sescoa Radionics SECONDARY FORMAT of This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone number Enter the appropriate number for the secondary format as follows O _ ow Speed 1 Contact I D 2 ADE MCO High Speed 3 gt A4DEMCO Express LOW SPEED FORMAT SECONDARY 0 Enter the appropriate value 0 ADE M CO Low Speed 1 Sescoa Radionics Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions 49 CHEC
48. door and window in turn Each action should produce 3 beeps from the keypad Walk in front of any motion detectors Listen for three beeps when the detector senses movement The keypad will display the zone number and alpha descriptor while a door or window remains open or while a detector remains activated The system automatically issues a Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on this zone to allow faulted detectors to be reset Toend this test enter any security code and press OFF An End of Walk Test message will be sent to the central station 30 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Armed Burglary System Test e Alarm messages will be sent to the central station during the following tests Notify the central station that a test will be in progress e Adisplay of COMM FAILURE indicates a failure to communicate no kissoff by the receiver at the central station after the maximum number of transmission attempts is tried If this occurs verify that the phone line is connected the correct report format is programmed etc 1 Arm the system and fault one or more zones Silence alarm sounder s each time by entering the code and pressing OFF Check that entry exit delay zones provide the assigned delay times 2 Check the keypad initiated alarms if programmed by pressing the panic keys and l and and or 3 and If the system has been programmed for audible emergency the
49. entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour minute month day and year e Press to accept the entered value The cursor then moves to the right e Press to move the cursor to the left of the display to the previous position e Enter the correct hour Then press to move to the minutes field and make the correct entry e Press kK again then press any key 0 9 to set AM PM Press any key again to change AM to PM or PM to AM e Press to move cursor to the month field position and enter the correct month using a 2 digit entry e Press and enter the correct date e Press kK and enter the correct year 3 Exit Clock Mode by pressing after the cursor is in the year position 27 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 27 2 SECTION 28 User Access Codes In This Section General Information User Codes and Leas of Authority ToAdd a Master Manager or Operator Code ToChangea Master Manager or Operator Code ToAdd an RF Key toan Existing User ToDde amp ea Maste Manager or Operator Code To Exit the Use Edit Mode General Information This system allows a total of 75 security access codes to be allocated each identified by a user ID number Regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to it occupies only one user slot in the system If a particular code is not used in all partitions that user ID number cannot be used again The Quick Arm feature
50. false alarms due to these circumstances are e Exit Error Logic and related reports e Exit Delay Reset e Cross Zoning Exit Error Logic and Related Reports U L This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors that are left open after the exit delay has expired If this feature is enabled in program field 1 20 the following will occur At the end of the exit delay if a door is left open or an interior zone is faulted the system will start the entry delay period and will sound the bell s siren s and keypad sounders for the duration of entry delay This gives the user time to reenter the premises and disarm the system before exit error occurs If the user does not reenter the premises and disarm the system the system will bypass the faulted entry exit and or interior zone s The rest of the system will be armed In addition the following Dialer reports will be sent to the central station if programmed e Exit Error by User not sent if using ADEMCO High Speed format e Exit Error by Zone Sent as regular alarm if using ADEMCO High Speed format e Bypass report VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Recent Close Report Another report designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 5 minutes of arming is called the Recent Close report This report as well as the Exit Error
51. for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Alarm reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLES This field is used to enter the alphanumeric paging service phone number for Trouble reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES r tt tty i This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Trouble reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES This field is used to enter the alphanumeric paging service phone number for Bypass reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Bypass reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number 71 72 73 74 75 76 79 80 Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES
52. indicates a trouble on a 4204CF Supervised Bell Output corresponding relay number 01 16 e CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 8XX where XX 00 31 indicates a trouble on a peripheral device connected to the panel s keypad terminals of the corresponding device address 00 31 e CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 9XX where XX 00 99 indicates that a system trouble exists dialers bell outputs ground fault etc See Section 22 Zone I ndex Zone Type Defaults If the problem has been corrected key an OFF sequence Security Code OFF twice to clear the display 30 4 Chapter 30 Testing TheSysten Other System Messages COMM FAILURE at the keypad indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone communication portion of your system LO BAT and a zone descriptor accompanied by a once per minute beep at the keypad indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter displayed Press any key to silence the audible warning sound SYSTEM LO BAT at the keypad Indicates that a low battery condition exists with the system s backup battery HSENS and a zone number indicates a smoke detector with a high sensitivity level which may cause false alarms The detector is dirty and should be cleaned or replaced LSENS and a zone number indicates a smoke detector with a low sensitivity level Detectors with a low sensitivity might not detect a smoke condition The detector should be cleaned
53. is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e If using an indoor antenna have a quality outdoor antenna installed e Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is reduced or eliminated e Move the receiver away from the control communicator e Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the control communicator e Plug the control communicator into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user or installer may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful Interference Handbook This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or User s Manual Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS In the event of telephone operational problems disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X CA38A in Canada wall jack We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lin
54. keypad will emit aloud steady alarm sound The word ALARM and a descriptor 999 will be displayed for and If 1 and are pressed a 995 will be displayed if 3 and are pressed a 996 will be displayed Silence the alarm by entering the security code and pressing OFF If the system has been programmed for silent panic there will be no audible alarms or displays A report will be sent to the central station however 3 Notify the central station that all tests are finished and verify results with them Trouble Conditions Supervisory Messages e A display of SU PV accompanied by a zone number 001 032 and an alpha descriptor if programmed indicates that a fire Supervisory condition exists on that zone This means that the operation of the fire alarm system may be compromised Check or Trouble Messages e A display of CHECK or TRB as per field 3x00 accompanied by a zone number 001 032 and an alpha descriptor indicates that a problem exists with that zone Zone trouble may be caused by one of the following conditions A hardwired fire zone is open broken wire A Day Night zone zone type 5 is faulted A polling loop zone is not seen by the control panel A polling loop zone has been tampered cover removed on a 4190 A wireless zone has not checked in during the time programmed in field 1 31 A 5800 Series transmitter has been tampered cover removed e CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 6XX where XX 01 16
55. local control non coded UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back up dialer module Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS See instructions for trigger use and programming i default functions shown i 1 OUT 4 SILENT PANIC DURESS 2 OUT 7 TROUBLE 3 OUT 3 BURGLARY AUDIBLE PANIC Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using 4 standoffs supplied BACK UP LINE SEIZE LED GREEN The 5140DLM Dialer Complies with FCC Rules Part 68 C Reg No AG398U 68628 MO N Ringer Equivalence 0 7B Connect to main PCB header J3 using ribbon cable supplied LOW 2K TO GROUND i HIGH 10 14VDC 20mA MAX LOW 1K TO GROUND HIGH 10 14VDC THRU 5K cae eee ate eS Gia eee eee a oe a eile tee 1 1234 5 678 9 O00000000 2 Make connections using 4142TR cable not supplied connect using supplied cable RATINGS OUT 1 5 7 Supervision is programmable i I O 4 OUT 6 SUPERVISORY Naf 0 BACK UP PHONE JACK 15 OUT 2 FIRE O SEE TELCO 6 OUT 5 REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER XN O JACK SHOCK Fp j34x 7 OUT 1 OPEN CLOSE re WARNING 8 GROUND BELOW 9 IN 1 N O LOOP ie 0 0 OTHER OUTS BACK UP DIALER ON HOOK 0 oT VOLTAGE THRESHOLD BLUE INTACT 25V i j wire to main PCB CUT 13V terminal 30 OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK UP DIALER MODULE BACK UP DIALER EARTH GRO
56. number Up to 10 digits may be entered e n field 69 enter the phone number of the paging service for Bypass reports Up to 17 digits may be entered 18 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide e n field 70 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Bypass reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered e Infield 71 enter the phone number of the paging service for Open Close reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e Infield 72 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Open Close reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered e n field 73 enter the phone number of the paging service for System reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e Infield 74 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for System reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered e Infield 75 enter the phone number of the paging service for Test reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e Infield 76 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Test reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered e Infield 1 70 enable the events for the event log e Infield 1 72 enable the Printer On Line option This must be turned on to allow events to be sent to the pager interface when they occur Field 3 19 MUST be programmed with a 1 in order for the printer and pager to operate properly 4100APG LED Indications Below is a table outlining the LED
57. of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY Alarm Device Manufacturing Company a Division of Pittway Corporation and its divisions subsidiaries and affiliates Seller 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 warrants its products to be in conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or for products not having an Ademco date stamp for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period in which case the shorter period shall apply Seller s obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing at its option free of charge for materials or labor any product which is proved not in compliance with Seller s specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than Ademco factory service For warranty service return product transportation prepaid to Ademco Factory Service 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREO
58. only if a fire alarm is present Outputs will resound automatically if a new fire alarm condition is detected Burglary alarms will not trigger the bell output until a User Code OFF is entered at the keypad A momentary short has no effect if there are no fire alarms present This mode is used to provide the fire department with keyswitch silence capability without compromising the burglary system s security LED indications are defined as follows GREEN RED MEANING OFF OFF DISARMED and NOT READY ON OFF DISARMED and READY OFF ON STEADY ARMED AWAY OFF SLOW FLASH ARMED STAY OFF RAPID FLASH ALARM MEMORY Open Close reporting for the keyswitch is enabled in field 40 and the keyswitch reports as User 0 5140LED Indicator Module 12 4 An optional 5140LED Indicator Module can be used in municipalities that require dedicated indicators for communicator fault status The 5140LED provides the following indicators 1 AC POWER e ON if AC power is present e OFF if AC power is not present 2 COMM FAILURE e ON if the maximum number of attempts were made field 3 21 to transmit a message to the central station Enter User Code OFF following a successful transmission to turn off e OFF if normal 3 DIALER 1FAULT e ON if the main dialer line is faulted Correct the problem and then enter User Code OFF to turn off e OFF if normal 4 DIALER 2 FAULT e ON ifthe backup dialer line is faulted Correct t
59. or replaced RCVR SET UP ERROR at the keypad Indicates that the system has more wireless zones programmed than the wireless receiver can support If this is not corrected none of the zones in the system will be protected If additional wireless zones are desired use an appropriate receiver MODEM COMM at the keypad indicates that the control is on line with a remote computer System Off Normal Report If programmed a unique Off Normal report will be generated instead of the periodic test report if any of the following conditions are present at the time of the report e Firetrouble on any zone zone response types 9 16 17 18 e Firesupervisory present zone response type 18 e Unrestored fire alarm on any zone e Bypass of any fire zone e Bell circuit fault for any supervised fire bell e Bypass disable of any supervised fire bell e Telco fault of either dialer line e Bypass disable of either dialer e Earth ground fault present e Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone e Fault on LORRA XMIT OK signal if enabled e LORRA trigger bypassed e AC failure e Low system battery e Keypad supervision fault This report will be sent as follows Contact ID Code 608 High Speed Channel 3 of system report used channel 9 6 Low Speed Digits programmed in System Group 4 report codes Report Code Programming in 93 Menu Mode of the Quick Start Guide 30 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Powe
60. p Guide 3 Run field wiring from the control to the keypads using standard 4 conductor cable of the wire gauge determined in step 1 4 If only one keypad is being used it may be connected to either Keypad Port 1 or 2 and must be mounted on or within 3 ft of the cabinet If multiple keypads are being used connect one to Keypad Port 2 and mount it on or within 3 ft of the cabinet Set the main keypad to an address of 00 This address cannot be disabled in programming Additional keypads can be mounted where desired and must be connected to K eypad Port l terminals 11 12 13 14 as shown in Figure 5 1 The keypad on Port 2 is electrically isolated from those on Port 1 and will continue to function even if wiring problems prevent the other keypads from working properly D BLACK 12 KEYPADS YELLOW CONTROL TERMINALS Figure 5 1 Keypad Connections to Keypad Port 1 Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads The control provides 1 amp of auxiliary standby power for powering keypads and other devices from the auxiliary power output Aside from this the control can support up to 16 peripheral devices keypads RF receivers relay modules etc The backup battery will Supply power to these devices in the event that AC power is lost A 1 amp load requires a 34 4 AH battery see Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure for more information When the control s auxiliary power load for all devices exc
61. programmed e When downloading the keypad displays MODEM COMM e After each download or a save an automatic time stamp is done indicating the date and time of the last download or save and the operator ID number e A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by connecting a printer to the computer Refer to your computer Owner s Manual or contact your dealer for printer recommendations Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading The VISTA 32FB can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line but by using a 4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading Software The direct wire downloading connection is to be temporary and is not part of the permanent installation Direct wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the installation process The connections between the control and the 4100SM are different than those shown in the 4100SM Installation Instructions See the diagram below for correct connections Instead of using the green wire referred to in step 2 of the IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY section of the 4100SM Instructions use the violet wire Connector J 8 on the main PC board see the Summary of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this manual is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer see Event Log printer Connections in Section 17 Event Log Options or a computer Make connections to a computer as shown below Note that the violet wire conn
62. reporting is selected for the VISTA 32F B then the LRR will follow that option The radio will send the appropriate reports to the primary and secondary central stations Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control Connect the data in out terminals and voltage input terminals of the radio to the control s keypad connection points terminals 11 12 13 and 14 as shown below Q BLACK Q2 LONG RANGE G GREEN RADIO YELLOW CONTROL TERMINALS Figure 13 1 Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio 13 2 The control s subscriber IDs can be passed to the LRR and incorporated into the transmitted data or the LRR can transmit the subscriber ID programmed in its own EEPROM see Device Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide An option exists to send the reports only via the LRR and bypass the control s dialer completely field 56 There is an option to stop transmissions via the LRR if communication via the control s dialer to the central station was successful field 57 TheLRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber ID Field 58 is for selecting the events for the primary subscriber s ID field 59 is for selecting the events for the secondary subscriber s ID The reporting categories are Alarms Troubles Bypasses Openings Closings System Events and Tests The control can be programmed to transmi
63. reports are programmed in Report Code Programming Mode refer to 93 Menu Modein the Quick Start Guide Exit Delay Reset UL This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation This feature is designed to allow an operator to re enter the premises e g to retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm This feature is enabled in program field 121 and works in the following way When the panel is armed the normal exit delay begins After the user exits and the door closes the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds If within this 60 second period the entry door is re opened the panel will restart the exit delay sequence using the programmed exit delay time This feature will only be activated once after arming Cross Zoning UL This feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation The Cross Zoning feature is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a 5 minute period of each other to cause an alarm on either zone This prevents momentary faults from one of the zones causing an alarm condition You can select four sets of cross zones keeping in mind the following e Both must protect the same area e Both must bein the same partition e A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area See warning below Note The four sets of cross zones are programmed in data fields 1 22 1x23 1x24 and 1 2
64. section of the PC board Use the two loops on the left and right side walls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps These steps are important to minimize the risk of panel RF interference with television reception DETAIL A SIDE VIEW OF BOARD INSERTED INTO SLOTS DETAIL B SIDE VIEW OF SHORT MOUNTING CLIPS Figure 4 3 Mounting the PC Board 4 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery As shipped the VISTA 32F B is supplied with a built in L8VAC transformer This transformer must be hard wired into the premises electrical system The optional 1451 18VAC transformer along with the optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit must be used for UL listed commercial burglary installation The 1451 transformer must also be hard wired into the premises electrical system Therefore it is recommended that all zones and expansion modules are wired according to each section s instructions before powering up the system for programming and testing Refer to Section 19 Final Power U p Procedure for specific instructions on how to connect the transformer and backup battery If desired each section can be wired programmed and tested individually before final power up Refer to Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure for battery standby calculations and battery selection table Panel Earth Ground Connections 4 4 When using the standard built in transformer shipped with
65. the READY message does not appear on any of the keypads in the system in either of the partitions or a NOT READY message is displayed check the keypad wiring connections Make sure each of the 8 basic hardwired zones has a 2000 ohm resistor connected across its terminals When the proper READY message is displayed on the keypad s addressed at 00 and 01 the system is functioning properly Do not remove the EOL resistors until you are ready to make connections to the hardwired zones to allow for testing described later in the manual If an OC or OPEN CIRCUIT message is present on the keypad data from the control is not reaching the keypad Please check the wiring SECTION 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001 008 In This Section Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1 8 Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1 8 Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2 Compatible 2 Wi re Smoke Detectors Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 8 Compatible 4 Wi re Smoke Detectors FireAlarm Verification for Smoke Detectors Zone 6 Tamper Configuration Wiring 2 WireLatching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 Compatible Glassbreak Detectors Programming Hardwired Zones Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1 8 e EOLR supervision optional for zones 3 8 supporting N O or N C sensors EOLR Supervision required for fire and UL Burglary installations e Can be individually assi
66. the number of partitions 1 2 to be used in the system 2x01 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END MONTH 04 10 EE Em Enter the months 00 12 in which daylight savings time starts and ends Enter 00 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user s region Standard setting for U S is 04 10 2x02 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END WEEKEND 1 5 Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows 1 first 2 second 3 third 4 fourth 5Sast o next to last 7 third from last Standard setting for U S is 1 5 23 15 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide UL 23 16 Fields 205 2x08 must be set to 0 for UL installations 205 AUTO ARM DELAY partition specific nsf Enter the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto arm warning time in values of 01 14 times 4 minutes Enter 00 if no delay is desired Enter 15 if auto arming is not desired 206 AUTO ARM WARNING PERIOD partition specific nsf Enter the time 01 15 in one minute increments during which the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to exit the premises before auto arming of the system Enter 00 to disable the warning period 207 AUTO DISARM DELAY partition specific nsf Enter the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto disarming of the system in values of 01 14 times 4 minutes Enter 00 if no delay is desired Enter 15 if auto disarming is not desired 2x08
67. there are two doctors offices and a common entrance area see example that follows explanation This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby Two programming fields affect the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions They are 1 18 Affects Lobby and 1 19 Arms Lobby 1 18 Affects Lobby must be programmed by partition Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows a When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby will also be disarmed b The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed c Arming the last partition that affects the lobby will not cause the system to automatically attempt to arm the lobby 1 19 Arms Lobby must be programmed by partition Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows a When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby will also be disarmed b The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed Section 2 Planning a Partitioned Systen c Arming the partition that is programmed to arm the lobby will cause the system to automatically attempt to arm the lobby If any faults exist in the lobby partition or another partition that a
68. to ZONES 1 8 ccccccssssccecceesseceeeceesseeeeeeseueeeeeesaaseeeeeesageeeessaaaeeeesssageeessssages 6 3 Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors cc cececceccssseceecceeseeeeecseuseeeeceeauaeeeeeesaesaeceeseeauaeeeesssagaeeeesseageeessseseeesenes 6 4 Fire Alarm Verification for SMOKE DetOCLOIS ccccceeeeccccessseceeccseeseeceeceaeeeeeessesseceessaaueeeeeeseeuseseeesseeeessaaaseegs 6 4 ZONES Tamper Conn Gur Gel ON orons eenn AE E 6 4 Wiring 2 Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 ccccccsssseccecceeseeeeeceeeuseeeessaauseeeesseaseeeeeessaaeeeseseaes 6 5 Compatible Glassbreak Det CtOIS ccccccssssscccccssesecececeeeeeceeecsaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeseseaeceeesseaseeeessuaaseeeeesaseeeessaeeeeseeas 6 5 Programming Hardwired ZONMES cccccccssssececceesseceecceesseceeeeeesseceeceeeuseeeesseuaeeeeessesaeceeeesseaaeeesensagaseaaeeesssaaageees 6 6 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Checkout Procedure for Hardwired ZOMGS c ccccccssssseecccesseeceeceeeseceeceeesecesseeaaseeeesseeaseeeesseaaseeeessesssseaseeeess 6 6 Section 7 2 Wire Polling Loop EXpansSion sssssssccsssssseeessnsseseessnsseeeenssseseesnnsseseesnnsseeeennesseseesnnssssenssessnaens 7 1 PONAT EOOD OVET VIEW caira e hoes sta esaeauieecs Sau waan cewaen nav atsaes elec onvanh dl weanstuengunuaaariaomeneteseane 7 1 Common Characteristics Of Polling Loop ZONGS ccccccssssecceccseseeeeecceesseseeeeesaeeeeeeseuaeeeeessaaseeeeessaaeessaa
69. to each telephone number 1 8 Must be 3 4 or 5 for NF PA72 compliant systems if a secondary number is programmed 3x30 DIALER SELECTION nmal Main Backup Enter 1 to enable each dialer that exists in the system 3431 BACKUP DIALER TOUCHTONE ROTARY 0 Enter the dialing method for the system s backup dialer Enter 1 for TouchTone Ofor rotary 3x50 ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES FOR ZONE TYPES 16 18 16 17 18 Enter 1 for each zone type to send a Restore message to the central station Default is 000 Must be 1 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations 3 55 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 1 0 Enter O and the first OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 1 output Enter 1 and the second OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 1 output 3 56 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 2 0 Enter O and the first OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 2 output Enter 1 and the second OFF sequence Security Code OFF after a fire alarm to de activate sounders and or strobe lights connected to Bell 2 output 3 57CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING BELL 2 and AUX RELAY oof Enter 1 to enable 1 2 second external alarm sounding ding at the end of exit delay or aft
70. to report results all fire zones tested and untested to the central station Built in User s Manual and Descriptor Review For end user convenience the VISTA 32F B contains a built in User s Manual By depressing any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds a brief explanation of that function scrolls across the alphanumeric display In addition all programmed zone descriptors can be displayed one at a time by pressing the READY key for five seconds This serves as a check for installers to be sure all descriptors are entered properly Improved Downloading Features e Uploads and downloads at 300 baud making upload download speed faster e Ability to upload ECP devices their physical addresses programmed addresses and firmware revision levels from the control Agency Listings Fire e UL864 NFPA 72 Local Central Station and Remote Station Burglary The below listings apply when the VISTA 32F B is used with the optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit and optional 1451 transformer e UL609 GradeA Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault e UL611 UL1610 Grades A AA Central Station e UL365 Grades A AA Police Connect SECTION 2 Planning a Partitioned System In This Section Theory of Partitioning Setting Up a Partitioned System Common Lobby Logic Master Keypad Setup and Operation Theory of Partitioning This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 2 different areas as i
71. to the central station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad No bell output is provided This zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing a button for use in personal emergencies or to a zone containing monitoring devices such as water sensors temperature sensors etc Type 09 Supervised Fire Without Verification This zone type provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble condition on open circuit The bell output must be programmed to pulse when this zone type is shorted This zone type is always active and cannot be bypassed Type 10 Interior W Delay This zone type gives entry and exit delays using the programmed entry exit time if tripped when the panel IS armed in the AWAY Mode This zone type is also active during MAXIMUM Mode but no entry delay Is provided alarms occur immediately if zone is tripped This zone type is automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the STAY or INSTANT Mode Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are violated regardless of whether or not an entry exit delay zone was tripped first 21 2 Section 21 Zone Type Definitions Type 16 Fire With Verification This zone type is used when smoke alarm verification is desired on hardwire and polling loop zones containing only 2 wire or 4 wire smoke detectors An open will initiate a trouble response and a short will initiate a fire alarm response Initial short detection causes 7 second smoke detector power reset Subsequent sh
72. walls ceilings floors closed doors glass partitions glass doors or windows Mechanical tampering masking painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors windows or any part of the optical system can re duce their detection ability Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature however as the ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90 to 105 F 82 to 40 C the detection performance can decrease Alarm warning devices such as sirens bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed rooms then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms Even persons who are awake may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo radio air conditioner or other appliance or by passing traffic Fi nally alarm warning devices however loud may not warn hearing impaired people Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily out of service Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended however occupants may have insufficient time to protect them selves from the emergency situation In the case of a monitored alarm system authoritie
73. will take place 21 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Type 02 Entry Exit 2 Burglary This zone type provides a secondary entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the panel is armed in the AWAY or STAY Mode When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode no entry delay Is provided Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is armed regardless of the arming mode selected These delays are programmable This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through which more time is needed to get to and from the keypad Delay times for this zone type must be greater than zone type 01 e g a garage loading dock or basement door Type 03 Perimeter Burglary This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone is faulted when the panel is armed in the AWAY STAY INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode This zone type is usually assigned to all sensors or contacts on exterior doors and windows Type 04 Interior Follower This zone type gives a delayed alarm using the programmed entry exit time if the entry exit zone is faulted first Otherwise this zone type gives an instant alarm This zone type is active when the panel is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM Mode MAXIMUM Mode eliminates the entry delay This zone type is bypassed automatically when the panel is armed tn the STAY or INSTANT Mode This zone type is usually assigned to a zone covering an area such as a foyer lobby or hallway through which one must pa
74. 0 ZZZ Zone Contact ID number reporting the alarm or user number for Open Close reports System status messages AC Loss Walk Test etc contain zeroes in the ZZZ location ADEMCO High Speed Reporting events by channel Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions 1 NEW EVENT 2 OPENING Status Channel Always 2 3 RESTORE 4 CLOSING Status Channel Always 4 5 NORMAL NO EVENT TO REPORT 6 PREVIOUSLY REPORTED NOT YET RESTORED Note Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1 9 A F if Open Close reporting is enabled 25 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide The status channel might have one of the following conditions 1 DURESS for duress plus Channels 9 15 only 2 OPENING 3 BY PASS for channels 1 8 only 4 CLOSING 5 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE for Channels 1 8 only 6 SYSTEM STATUS e AC LOSS in Channel 1 e LOW BATTERY in Channel 2 e TIME SET in Channel 3 e LOG CLEAR in Channel 3 e LOG 50 FULL in Channel 3 e LOG 90 FULL in Channel 3 e LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3 e POWER ON RESET in Channel 4 e WALK TEST START END in Channel 8 7 NORMAL ALARM STATUS Channels 1 8 Only 9 TEST REPORT Explanation of Channels 9 15 If there is a 1 inthe status channel and lin the 1st location Duress lin Channels 9 15 Zone alarm on those channels 3 in Channels 9 15 Restore on those channels 6 in Channels 9 15 Previously reported alarm not restored A typical high speed report may look like this 1
75. 0 0 FIELD 3 20 DEFAULT LORRA LORRA LORRA XMIT OKAY XMIT OKAY XMIT OKAY PRINTER DTR KEYSWITCH 5140LED AS SELECTED OPEN CLOSE ARMED LED AC FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 REMOTE KEYSWITCH 5140LED AS SELECTED CONSOLE SOUNDER READY LED DIALER 2 FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 1 FIELD 3 20 2 FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM PRINTER RXD FIRE FIRE FIRE AS SELECTED SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY IN FIELD 3 20 BURGLARY BURGLARY 5140LED AS SELECTED ALARM ALARM COMM FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 TROUBLE TROUBLE TROUBLE AS SELECTED IN FIELD 3 20 PANIC ALARM PANIC ALARM 5140LED AS SELECTED DIALER 1 FAIL LED IN FIELD 3 20 MAKE CONNECTIONS USING 4142TR 1 SUPPLIED Figure 12 1 J 2 Pin Assignments and Functions Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad s built in sounder The panel will remote all sounds i e alarm trouble chime entry exit etc produced by the keypad s built in sounder except for the short beeps associated with keypad key depression One application of this feature might be to produce chime sounds at a distant location from the panel s keypads If used program field 3 20 must be set to 0 factory default to enable the remote sounder option and field 15 must be set to the desired partition number The PAL 328N must be connected toJ 2 OUT 5 as shown in Figure 12 2 J2 CONNECTOR AMSECO PAL 328N PIEZO SOUNDER
76. 1 WARNING THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM While this System is an advanced wireless security system it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary fire or other emergency Any alarm system whether commercial or residential is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari ety of reasons For example Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or disconnect an alarm warning device Intrusion detectors e g passive infrared detectors smoke detectors and many other sensing devices will not work without power Battery operated devices will not work without batteries with dead batteries or if the batteries are not put in properly Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason however briefly Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver Even if the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States they may not activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35 of all fires according to data published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency Some of the rea
77. 1 Extend Closing Window essssssssssessrrrrerressrrrrrrreesrrnne 24 2 EXTENDED DELAY FOR TYPES 17 amp 18 23 18 Extending Closing TiMe ssssssssssssrrrrrressrrrrrrressrnnn 29 3 External Sounders s ssssssssrrrrsesrrrrrrrressrrrrrrressrrnn 14 1 False Alarm Reduction esssssssnnssssrrrrrrreessrrrrrrressrnen 3 1 FEC PART 68 NOTIG Enrio tunes A 4 FCC REGISTRATION NO nicsbsotisatinro aaa C 1 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC STATEMENT rrea A 4 FIREALARM SILENCED nevdcancosoiivarotainna 14 3 Fire Alarm Verification ccccccecsssseeeesseseeeeesseeeeeeeens 6 4 FIRE DISPLAY LOCK seriinnierdii nine 23 17 Fre DE TESE coenen N 30 2 Fire Supervisory Type 18 ccccccsssssseeeeeeeseeesseeeees 21 3 Fire Walk Test MOde ccccscccccsssseeeessesseeeessesseeeeees 1 6 Fire Waterflow Type 17 sssssssssssessrrrrrreessrrrrrrressrrnn 21 3 Fire With Verification Type 16 sesers 21 3 First commMu UnNI Cati sissies isaac sai ei eae 26 2 FIRST TEST REPORT TIME cccccccccssssseseeeeeees 23 10 FOCE ATII ea se Reneee ahaa eases ies 24 2 Pwd P OWER COSS mircean A 13 3 FUSTO reoaine meeeteceaendiennnena vadiesentnntaoasteanne C 1 General Description sssssssssesssrrrrrressrrrrrrressrrnrrereesne 1 1 Getting On Line with a Control Panal 26 2 Glopal AIM Crore a a A S 28 5 GlOD a AT MII G ia in teu vtstuonaieusia 2 4 29 3 GO NO GO TESMER 8 9 GOTO COMMaNGS ee en ieee et eaceee 29 4 Gra
78. 108 HO 120 FACTORY DEFAULTS Y Activates for Zones 1 8 alarms steady alarm output e No timeout GQNNOYD NOTES e Use non polarized indicating devices e Wiring is not supervised e Do not exceed ratings of the fe supply used If Aux Pwr 1 output is used the combined alarm current drain from Aux Pwr 1 Aux Pwr 2 Bell 1 and Bell 2 cannot exceed 2 3A max 7 A Can draw power from Aux Pwr 1 output or from separate supply Figure 15 1 Auxiliary Relay Used as Unsupervised Bell Output 15 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Trouble Supervisory Activation 3 61 0 Steady activation in response to any zone or system related trouble condition or to any fire Supervisory condition Remains activated until all fault conditions have been corrected and the User Code OFF has been entered 4 Wire Smoke Detector Reset 3 61 2 Momentary 6 second activation at second entry of User Code OFF sequence which interrupts power to 4 wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones zones 1 8 or to polling loop zones allowing the detectors to be reset following an alarm Power to 4 wire smoke detectors should be wired to the auxiliary relay and to the Auxiliary Power 1 output as shown in Figure 15 2 Battery Saver 3 61 3 When this function is selected the auxiliary relay will normally be activated i e N O and pole contacts will be connected N C contact will b
79. 234 5115 5555 7 Acct 1234 with alarms on Channels 2 and 3 1234 5555 1555 1 Acct 1234 with alarm on Channel 12 Limitations e When using ADEMCO High Speed remember there are only 15 channels available plus a duress channel If more than 15 zones are being used they will have to share channels e With ADEMCO High Speed reporting channels 9 15 cannot report troubles or bypasses Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions e Only user numbers 1 15 can be uniquely reported with Open Close reports in ADEMCO High Speed Loading Communication Defaults 25 4 To help expedite the installation the system provides 4 different communication defaults Low Speed ADEMCO Express ADEMCO High Speed and ADEMCO s Contact ID You may load communications defaults at any time However it is recommended that the panel be defaulted first 97 only if no other programming has been done If other programming has already been done there is no need to default the panel Section 25 System Communication Toload communication defaults do the following Enter Program Mode Installer Code 8 0 0 Once the Programming Mode is entered first press 94 and then enter one of the following field numbers TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS PRESS TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAM SET 80 Low Speed communication defaults x81 ADEMCO 4 2 Express communication defaults 82 ADEMCO High Speed communication defaults 83 Contact
80. 3 15 Operator Access L VEIS ccccccccssssssssseeeeeessseaeseeeeees 26 3 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 1 Operator Level Codes ccccccccsssssseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseees 28 2 CATEGORY ENABLE ssssssssssssssrrrrrinesrenrnrnnnnnsennns 23 8 Output Device Control ssssssssessssssrnrrrrressrrrrrrressrnnne B 2 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 2 OULDUU RELAYS im aati ateaueaeihs 1 4 CATEGORY ENABLE nnna 23 8 Long Range Radio Trouble Messages eenseen 13 3 Long Range Subscriber sessserrersessrrnrrrreessrnrrenee 12 1 LOW SPEED FORMAT PRIMARY cee 23 6 LOW SPEED FORMAT SECONDARY 23 6 PABX ACCESS CODE atic i Mentiin aa 23 4 LRR Battery sisciiics edd iauieits ee i eden eens 13 3 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS 23 8 PRR CRG NS Daisne a aa 13 3 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSEG 000008 23 8 LRR reporting options cccccccssseeseeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeas 13 1 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSEG 23 9 ESEN Seron E 30 5 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM e 23 9 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TEST 23 9 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES 23 8 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMG 23 8 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSEG 23 8 IWEAGE OS herder a a a a e annie 29 5 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES 23 9 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM 23 9 I ndex 4 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST 23 9 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLEG 23 8 PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY ccccceeeeeees 23 12 PANCE Cy Senne lcs eee ue eee ete
81. 3 in the Device Programming Mode refer to 93 Menu Mode Programming in the Quick Start Guide will make that keypad a master keypad A master keypad reflects the status of the entire system Partitions 1 2 on its display at one time This is useful because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to log on to various partitions from one partition s keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred The following is a typical display SYSTEM 12 STATUS RN Possible status indications include A Armed Away M Armed Maximum S Armed Stay Armed Instant R Ready N Not Ready B Bypassed Ready Alarm Memory Trouble present To obtain more information regarding a particular partition enter Partition No e g 2 This will allow viewing only of that partition In order to affect that partition the user must enter a code that has access to that partition Also in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 3 to view the status of all partitions that user must have access to all partitions Otherwise access will be denied The following would be displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 Loading Dock Window on Partition 1 Warehouse when logging on from a keypad on Partition 2 WHSE DISARMED HIT FOR FAULTS VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Pressing will cause the following display to appear at Partition 1 s keypad s FAULT 002 LOADING DOCK WINDOW Addition
82. 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 9 4 SECTION 10 4285 4286 VIP Module In This Section General Information Mounting the VIP Module Wiring the VIP Module U L The 4285 4286 VIP Module is not permissible in commercial fire or UL commercial burglary installations General Information The 4285 4286 VIP Module is an add on accessory that permits the user to access the security system and relays via a Touch tone telephone either from the premises or by calling the premises from a remote location Only one VIP Module can be used in a security system This module must be enabled as Device Address 4 in Device Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide and must be assigned toa partition The 4285 4286 VIP Module offers the following features Allows the user to receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the status of the security system Allows the user to arm and disarm the security system and perform most other commands using the telephone keypad Allows the user to control relays using the telephone keypad Provides voice annunciation over the phone to confirm any command that is entered Announces many of the same words that would normally be displayed on an alpha keypad under the same system conditions Refer to the words in bold on the Alpha Vocabulary list found in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide Can be supervised for connection to co
83. 5 DO NOT cross zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone and both must be protecting the same physical area no walls or partitions separating them Consult NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements As a guideline it is recommended that spacing between fire cross zones be no farther than 30 ft Section 3 False Alarm Reduction Features Conditions That Affect Cross Zone Operation 1 In the event of a continuous fault lasting at least 5 minutes on one of the paired zones a fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately 2 If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0 the cross zoning feature will not apply 3 If an entry exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone be sure to enter the entry exit zone as the first zone of the pair This will ensure that the entry delay time is started before the follower zone Is processed 4 If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones the relay will activate without the other zone being faulted 5 If a relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble both zones must trip before the relay will activate and both zones must be restored for the relay to deactivate if relay IS programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore Call Waiting Defeat Logic Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms it may prevent
84. 6 Interior Follower Type 04 cccccsssssseeeeseesseeseseeees 21 2 Mastar C OGG i nnen aa r aia 28 2 Master KK CY DOG ssiri enin AET E 2 5 MAX OF DIALER RETRIEG 0seeeeeeeeeees 23 19 Mechanics Of ProgrAMmMing cccccccsssssseseeeeessseeeees 20 1 MODEM COMM w iicciccisteuicudvienmeteraducdcemmnnets 26 3 30 5 VZ PGR AD EUS ire aE ONE 12 1 Mounting the 4100APG cccsseccssesseceesessesetsessesetseceees 18 1 Mounting the Control Cabinet ccccceecceesssseseeeeeees 4 1 Mounting The KeypadS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 5 3 Mounting the VIP MOdule ccccccsseeseeeeeeesseeeeeeees 10 2 MOIRA CCCSS T sccnernas AE E A 28 5 Keypad Macros UUELE AL AS aea oai e ei 23 3 KEYPAD PANIC ENA BDE S ccc 23 2 Multiple Partition ACCESS ee eeeeees 28 4 Keypad Panic K YS cccssseceeeccsssssseeeeeessssassseeeeeeeeeas 1 3 Keypad POr Ui tacd ant taetstaactnatnretticlea Dawitrsadedartraseasttl 5 2 Keypad PORE Zarin aAA 5 2 Keypads NEE rE a EA NEA waa wea wa et 2 1 5 1 National Electric Olo o 3 4 4 ICY SWVC aate N E E TEE 1 5 National Fire Protection Association s NFPA Standard KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT s ssssssssssrrssesssrnnnrrnnenns 23 2 FID tia ses sare te EEA E P E E E A E E ji Keyswitch LEDs rE e nS in tiie Mean sere 12 4 NoAlarm Response Type PE beta has Actin sitet dici les A 21 3 Keyswitch Operation and Wiring T E 12 2 NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR ZONES 3 8 aren 23 5 KISSOFF nnnnnnnnnnnnnnNNNNNNNNNNN
85. ABX has a backup power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours central station usage or 60 hours remote station usage Many PABXs are not power backed up and connection to such a PABX will result in a communication failure if power is lost Dialer Operation 16 2 When only the main dialer is enabled 1 0 in field 3 30 the VISTA 32FB will attempt to route all calls over the main output When both main and backup dialers are enabled 1 1 in field 3 30 the VISTA 32FB will attempt to route all calls over the main output until a fault is detected at which time it will attempt to use the backup output Line faults will result in a zone 974 DIALER 1 FAULT or a zone 975 DIALER 2 FAULT display The communicator will make up to eight attempts to transmit a report to one or both telephone numbers depending upon the report routing option programmed After the eighth attempt the communicator will hang up and a COMM FAIL will be displayed at the keypad The number of dialer attempts are programmed in field 3x21 default 8 must be restricted to 3 4 or 5 attempts if a secondary phone number is programmed Periodic test reports will be alternated between the main and back up telephone lines in an effort to continually use and check both lines The VISTA 32FB will transmit reports in the following order Alarms fire medical panic burglary Fire Supervisories and Troubles remaining types of messages See Section 26 Systen Communi
86. Alternatively you may use a 4100SM interface module to direct wire the control panel to your computer at the site 26 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Getting On Line with a Control Panel At the protected premises the control panel must be connected to the existing telephone line refer to Section 26 System Communication section No programming of the panel is required before downloading to an initial installation To download do the following 1 Enter the Installer Code 5 The panel temporarily enables a ring count of five and sets the Download Callback option to 1 callback not required Call the panel using the downloader software set to First Communication M ode The downloader will establish a session with no callback The panel information can then be downloaded 4 In order to remotely access control or program the alarm panel a link must be established between the computer and the control panel as follows a The computer calls up the control panel The phone number for each customer is entered into the customer s account file on the computer b The control panel answers at the pre programmed ring count and executes a handshake with the computer c Thecomputer sends a request for callback to the control unless callback is not required d Thepanel acknowledges the request and hangs up During the next few seconds the control will process the request making sure certain encr
87. Contact ID event code 333 Is sent to the central station This message is an indication that the RF receiver is deaf The fault may be accompanied by a supervision fault for one or more RF transmitters 2 If the receiver has detected a condition that may impede proper RF reception I e jamming or other RF interference The control checks the receiver for this condition every 45 seconds A CHECK or TRBL message will appear for zones 988 second receiver or 990 first receiver if response type 19 is assigned to these supervisory zones and if programmed Contact ID event code 344 is sent to the central station U L A response type must be programmed for zones 990 first receiver and 988 second receiver if the control is used for UL commercial fire and burglary installations e Thecontrol checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds If the panel has lost communication with the receiver a CHECK or TRBL message will appear for the respective receiver supervisory zone 8 2 digit receiver device address for example Device address 05 supervisory zone 805 Supervisory zones must be programmed for 24 hour trouble type 19 The CHECK or TRBL display may be an indication that the wiring to the receiver is incorrect or that the DIP switches are not set for the same address the receiver was assigned to in the control s Device Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide Section 8 Wirdess Zone Expansion e Two
88. Duress reporting e The Duress report triggering logic activates on the 5th key depression Such as OFF not the 4th key depression last digit of code Duress reports will not be triggered if the 5th key is a such as when performing a GOTO or viewing the capabilities of a user General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the system based on the user code authority levels e Master Codes and all lower level codes can be used interchangeably when performing system functions within a partition a system armed with a user s temporary code can be disarmed with the Master Code or another user s temporary code except the Operator Level C Code described above e A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER authority than that which he is assigned e A user levels O 1 and 2 only may only ADD users toa LOWER authority level e A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he himself has access e A user code can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition it was created in e User numbers must be entered in 2 digits Single digit user numbers must therefore always be preceded by a 0 e g 03 04 05 etc Make sure the end user understands this requirement Temporary codes are entered as 4 digit numbers 28 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Open Close Reporting Note When ad
89. E TYPES 1 8 maania Enter 1 to enable Restore reporting for individual zone types Enter 0 if no Restore report is desired for a zone type Default is 00000000 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9 10 9 10 Enter 1 to enable Restore reporting for individual zone types Enter 0 if no Restore report is desired for a zone type Default is 00 23 9 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 10 83 84 85 87 88 89 90 FIRST TEST REPORT TIME 00 12 00 rr ff te yf Enter the day 00 07 and time 00 23 hours 00 59 min that the first Test report shall be transmitted Enter 00 in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting Enter 00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the time that is set Note Day 01 Monday See Report Code Programming System Group 1 in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide for assigning the Test Report Code SWINGER SUPPRESSION partition specific paf This option limits the number of messages alarms or troubles sent for a specific channel in an armed period Swinger Suppression Enter 01 15 f 00 is selected all alarm or trouble codes are reported Must be 00 disabled for commercial fire and UL installations ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS and DURESS 0000 partition specific 995 996 999 Duress Enter 1 for each panic duress for which reporting is desired Note To e
90. E WIRES COLORS CONNECT TO POLLING LOOP GROUND SCREW 4142TR CABLE 4 7K 7920SE RADIO QO m g 5 AlI 2o 4ig om O xa gam g g 53 PANIC ALARM OJS 5N j Sja 23 FIRE SUPERVISORY 6 O m Gaz TROUBLE 5 A Z_ 6 vZ oe NOTES J 1 The 7920SE cabinet is at circuit ground 8 D d potential and must be isolated from earth 9 Z I ground to avoid earth ground faults 0 2 Enable trigger supervision pulses 2 21 when 7920SE mounted more than 3 feet from control Run wires from control to 7920SE in conduit and use PVC conduit or equivalent means to isolate cabinets of each unit Figure 12 5c Connections to 7920SE Long Range Radio VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Event Log Printer Connections The VISTA 32F Bs event log can be printed on a local serial printer If it is used program field 3x19 must be set to 1 This setting overrides the functions selected for INPUT 1 and OUT 2 made in field 3 20 Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J 2 connector using an ADE MCO 4100SM Interface module Refer to Section 17 Event Log Options for wiring connections printer configuration and a description of the keypad commands that initiate event log printing If earth ground fault sensing is enabled 1 An earth ground fault indication can be received when the 4100SM Module is clipped directly onto a sidewall of the VISTA 32FB cabinet If this occurs use an insulator to insulate the 4100S
91. ESPONSE TYPE 8 23 3 Burglary Walk TeSt rasnamen aa 30 3 BUTEO R Pornar erener sienna alien AE 8 5 Bypass COMMANAG ccccccceesesseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeas 24 12 Bypassing ZONES inini 29 2 Index 2 California State Fire Marshal cccccsssssseeseeeeeeees A 3 Call Waiting Defeat i ccccccssssseeeeeesssssssseeeeeeeeens 3 3 CALL WAITING DEFEAT c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 23 13 G ec e Ceeeeertrere cree stern rcrtr ee renee cerrctcmrretrt ter 26 2 Callback Requested cceeeeceeessssesseeeeeeseseaaeeeeeeseees 26 3 CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS PEETA I AAE PEE EE A AE S TN EN TOST A 5 Characteristics of Polling LOOP seesssessesssessrrrrrrreesrenn 7 1 Characteristics of Wireless Zones ssssssssesseessrrrrenee 8 1 Check Messages sssssrnrrnressrrnrrrrensrrnrrrreessrnnrenne 30 4 CHECK Or TRB dorine E E 7 5 CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 17 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION esseere 23 7 CHING OCS aai N ANTA 29 2 CHIME ON BELE Ticsaiiciucvtevtere seteiativisateid anocedextantss 23 13 Class B SUDEP VISION druidas Ea 14 1 Code FA FOB a o aa a a 30 2 Coert FO aea 30 2 COUS FTES T 5 huara a a 30 3 COMM FAM krn T 16 2 COMM FAILURE ncprossenernotanan aa 30 5 COMM SPLIT REPORT SELECTION cees 23 13 Common L ODDY rdias dries ieaedei leur ieeedaes 2 2 Communication Defaults cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20 1 25 4 COMMUNICATIONS F OF MALS cccseeeee
92. F IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented that the products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary robbery fire or otherwise or that the products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection Customer understands that a properly installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary robbery fire or other events occurring without providing an alarm but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result CONSEQUENTLY SELLER SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING HOWEVER IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN SELLER S MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER This warranty replaces any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product No increase or alteration
93. FEATURES ON PARTITION 1 23 20 ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS amp DURES Snae aN 23 10 ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO ARM 23 16 ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION 23 17 ENABLE J 2 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION 23 17 ENABLE OPEN CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE aE ate AEE oa eee E 23 5 Entering Programming M Ode ccccccccsssseseeseeeeeeees 20 2 ENTRY DELAY GEL crimen i REES 23 1 ENTRE DELAY T wusectcusablsanlerdoumenMeruielivusagdinie 23 1 PE ole Th OS anina E 20 3 ENTERO WARNING cairai a 23 10 Entr y E Xt AL Type OL iisen 21 1 Entry E XIE F2 Type O2 nionl 21 2 E VENT EOQ orma 1 5 EVENT UO Gass ie sates n 12 8 E Vent LOJ GEAR sarsie haian ai ie nia yeasendeOees 17 5 Event COJ Options sieccocaiicadineeota anteaters istics 17 1 Event Log Printer Connections s es 12 8 17 1 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE ses 23 15 Event Log Programming ccccccsssseseceessssseeeeeeeeeeeas 17 3 EVENT LOG TYPE Sica istucipethec datnnutaateoveatin ens 23 14 Event Logging COMMANGG cceceeeeeessseeseeeeeeeeeens B 1 Event Logging Proceduress ccsccecceeessssssseeseeeeeeees 17 3 Exception Reports ssssssssssessrrrrrrreosrrnrrrreessrnrrrreeene 24 3 EXIT DELAY Fansa E vieatancateeneieepace 23 1 EXE DELAY Piri uA O eens 23 1 EXET DE AY RESET aras aota a 3 2 EXIT DELAY RESE Porre a a 23 11 EXIT DELAY SOUNDIN Gvviiicecscesices eanecceeiiveseons 23 13 EXICETCO enora aN 1 6 3 1 EXIT ERROR LOGIC ue eaaa 23 1
94. FORCE ARM ENABLE FOR AUTO ARM partition specific of Enter Lif the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones when it attempts to auto arm Otherwise enter 0 209 OPEN CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION partition specific of Enter Lif Open Close reports are to be sent only if the openings closings occur outside the arm and disarm windows Open reports will also be suppressed during the closing window in order to prevent false alarms if the user arms the system then reenters the premises e g to retrieve a forgotten item Note that openings and closings are still recorded in the event log Enter O if Exception reporting is not desired Note This field must be set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be sent 2x10 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM DISARM WINDOWS partition specific of Enter 1 if disarming of the system should be allowed only during the arming disarming windows or if the system is in alarm if 2x11 is set to 1 Note that this applies only to Operator level users Installer Master and Manager level users can disarm the system at any time Enter O0 if disarming can occur at any time O disable for displayed partition 1 nable for displayed partition 2x11 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS 0 Used only if field 2x10 partition specific field is set to 1 Enter 1to allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm opening window if an alarm has occurred Enter Oto allo
95. HER PARTITIONS 0 Enter 1 to allow burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition s keypad s Otherwise enter O 2 24 DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS 0 Enter 1 to allow troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition s keypad s Otherwise enter 0 3 00 CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY 0 Enter 1to display the letters TRBL instead of CHECK when a zone or system trouble occurs Enter Oto display CHECK 301 FIRE DISPLAY LOCK 0 Enter Oto scroll all alarms Enter 1 to lock display of first fire alarm press to display other alarms 23 17 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 3 12 ZN TYPE 18 DELAY USE mf Enter O0 if there is to be no delay for zone type 18 Enter 1 to use delay set in field 3x16 for zone type 18 Note For UL Listed installations combined initiating device s delay and this field s delay cannot exceed 90 seconds 3x13 SUPERVISORY ON OPEN and SHORT of Enter 0 if you want a supervisory response on a shorted zone and a trouble response on an open zone Enter 1 if you want a supervisory response on either a shorted or an open zone 3x14 WATERFLOW ALARM SILENCE OPTION of Enter 0 if you want waterflow supervisory zones to be silenced by entering the Code OFF Enter Lif you want waterflow supervisory zones to silence automatically when waterflow ceases This feature may only be set to 1 by permission of the l
96. ID communication defaults Loading communication defaults results in the following Low Speed e Selects low speed standard format with no checksum for both phone numbers 94 80 Assigns the following report codes 03 for zones 003 032 01 for zones 001 002 02 for zones 995 996 999 keypad panics 09 for all alarm restores e Enables all zone type restores e For expanded reporting enable fields 52 and 53 ADEMCO e Selects ADEMCO Express reporting format with checksum for both phone numbers Express Report codes for zones 001 032 RF receiver and keypad panics are sent as their 94 81 respective zone ID numbers Duress is sent as DD Alarm restoreis E 2nd digit e Enables all zone type restores ADEMCO e Selects ADEMCO High Speed format with no checksum for both phone numbers ua e Zone reporting is assigned to channels as described later in this section i e Enables all zone type restores 94 82 e Enables duress to be sent ADEMCO s Selects Contact ID format for both phone numbers mane e Reporting is enabled for all zones e Enables all zone type restores 94 83 e Refer tothe Table of Contact ID Event Codes to follow 25 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES Code Definition Fire Alarm Smoke Alarm Fire w Verification Water Flow Alarm 113 121 122 123 124 125 131 132 133 Duress Silent Panic Audible Panic Duress
97. IK CYS stati cette ta tutebaictediyleinaa cere dis E ayvione aueaus eile E on obsia atone eadiandea a n aster iaerouaees 29 5 Speed Key TDI MACOS heana RE seas caren eeascaniais ainda aaa seein aaa aaRe ae ace 29 5 Manual Relay Activation M ode 70 Mode cccccssssecccccessseceecceueeececeesseeeesseuseceeesesuaeeesessaaeeeeessaaseesssaagess 29 6 Section 30 Testing th System secs Aaa a Aaaa aaa Oa 30 1 Batto y TE Caia A E A A E me sncmnuacaen a aenesmceatel ss 30 1 Dialer CST eaateeion sn e A A a 30 1 FIFE DEL Fest codel Ae FOO hanana aA eebatae sant onan sas aoa 30 2 One Man Fire Walk Test Code 68 cccccccccsssseeeecceesseeeeceeeuseceeeeeeaaeceeseeeaseeeesseagseeeesseagseeesssaageeness 30 2 BUEGLarY Walk Iest CodesE TEST 5 icsrwusicenas aA etn eatin vat 30 3 Armed Burglary SYSEQMN Test inwiAtsscasiincreewvan vine aiansenssaanmeiedais aia naan anes 30 4 TEROUDIEG Condition jticissisiste sara ttincs ae aia neal neat anise aes hea ea ONaaOd 30 4 Turning the System Over to the USES cccssecccccsssseceeceeesseeeeceseuseceeseeeaseeeeseneaaaeeeesseaaeeeessaaaeeessagseeeessaagees 30 6 TOG HM SEIN lc sc cece a mean aeiaioa ea hata oness TO a oma oe eaeaa anne 30 6 Appendix A Regulatory Agency Statement sccsssssssssssseeeeessssssseeeeeeeseaasseseeeesnaaaseseeeessnaasssesseeesnnanenes A 1 UL Installation R COU IN CIMGN ES aia sin ecsweusacenaiesaauat poss nosatn une ennieansaaaenasaaakeoireaunsma dun
98. In this example 06 Timer 07 00PM Start Time 11 45PM Stop Time PORCH LITE Descriptor for Output Device 4 04 Output Device affected by this timer Press to continue 06 ENTER OUTPUT Enter the desired output number 01 16 PORCH LITE 04 As the number is entered the descriptor for that output device will be displayed Press to continue Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer Timer 06 in this example and displays an output descriptor of None Output devices are programmed via 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide 06 ON TIME The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the 07 00 PM ON time Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner Hitting any key in the 0 9 range while the cursor is under the AM PM position toggles the AM PM indication Press to continue 06 OFF TIME The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the 11 45 PM OFF time Enter the desired hour Press x to move to the minutes field The minutes are 24 19 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 24 20 06 DAYS MTWTFSS HIT 0 7 X X 06 Permanent 0 NO 1 YES 0 entered in the same manner Pressing any key in the 0 9 range while the cursor is under the AM PM position toggles the AM PM indication Press Q to continue To select the days that are to be activated enter 1 7 Monday 1 An x
99. JACK Breaker A WENCLOSURE SUPERVISED of wo amp sj g WARNING TA 3 j TO PREVENT lower left corner of cabinet SS S uk Oe cnn ye Q a REPLACE COVER AFTER OUTPUT 18VAC 72VA J Red Bk Grn Yel RISK OF L Not Power Limited BELL BELL _ 3S REMOTE KEYPADS ELECTRICAL gt Maintain 1 4 spacing i i POLLING SHOCK INPUT to other wire AUX RELAY FORM C 6139 6139A LOOP DISCONN ECT 120VAC 60HZ BLA XBL programmable response t See Note 3 __ TELCO JACK 1 0A max WHITE HORN HORN K ot supervised 7 Contact Rating BEFORE Connect to a 28V 2 8A ERVICIN Pe A f Z resisivetoads AUXILIARY POWER 1 lt THIS PANEL have insulation rated amp n A Ha SAC rae 4209U Connect to for 90 C or higher Eenh Ground 2k Note 2 2k Ssa Neie t EART GROUND Pea E GRN GRN Terminal 30 ALARM POLARITY SHOWN not supervised See instructions for istr ti ne proper earth ground Each output may be selected for Style Y supervision or no supervision See main PCB jumpers W1 W4 and zone 970 971 programming FIRE CKTS Supervise using 2k EOLR Use polarized sounding devices BURG CKTS Supervision not req d EOLRs not req d May use non polarized devices Ratings 10 14VDC 1 7A max See note 1 see instructions for compatible devices For commercial fire bell timeout must be a minimum of 6 minutes ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT THE OUTPUT OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER NOTE 1 The com
100. KSUM VERIFICATION woof Enter 1 for either or both primary secondary formats to send a verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send two message rounds Selection is valid for 3 1 4 1 and 4 2 reports Enter 0 if not desired 50 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT 0 51 52 53 56 57 Enter 0 if Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0 9 B F reporting Enter Lif Sescoa format is to be used with only numeric reporting 0 9 Note that selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers DUAL REPORTING 0 This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers Enter Lif all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers If used with Split Reporting option 1 1 34 Alarms go to both primary and secondary numbers while all other reports go to secondary only If used with Split Reporting option 2 alarms go to both lines Open Close and Test messages go to secondary only while all other reports go to primary If used with Split Reporting option 3 Fire Alarms and Supervisory reports go to primary all reports go to secondary Enter Oif Dual Reporting is not desired STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY Alm Rst Byp Trbl Opn Cls_ Low Batt Enter O for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone number default is O Note E xpanded overrides 4 2 format STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY Alm Rst Byp Trbl O
101. MCO Express e ADEMCO High Speed e ADEMCO Contact ID e Long Range Radio interface ECP Audio Alarm Verification Option Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification AAV option that can be used in conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog between an operator at the central station and a person at the premises An optional AAV unit such as Eagle Model 1250 is required VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide The Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed Cross Zoning Capability Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless its cross zone is also faulted within 5 minutes Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature e System can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an entry exit door open If not subsequently disarmed faulted E E zone s and or interior zones will be bypassed and the system will arm e Generates an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the central station knows it was an exit alarm and who caused It Enhanced Fire Walk Test Mode Provides the installer the ability to test fire zones more quickly and reliably The following features apply e Automatic test of all integrated RPM polling loop devices that have the automatic test feature e Dynamic display of all fire zones that remain untested while test is in progress e Ability to log results all fire zones tested and untested in system s event log e Ability
102. Ms clip on bracket from the VI STA 32F B cabinet sidewall Later production versions of the 4100SM have the clip on bracket isolated from the circuit ground Terminal 7 and will not have this problem 2 Anearth ground fault indication can also be received when a printer or PC that has a 3 prong grounded power cord is used If this occurs first verify that Pin 1 chassis ground is isolated from Pin 7 signal ground on the 4L00SMs RS232 connector Early production versions of the 4100SM have an unmarked 3 8 long bare wire jumper lying near the Pin 1 side of the RS232 connector which must be cut to isolate these pins Then verify that these pins are isolated on the printer s RS232 connector Follow the instructions provided with the printer to isolate these pins if required Direct Wire Downloading 12 8 The VISTA 32FB can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line but by using a 4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading Software This method of downloading is referred to as DIRECT WIRE downloading Connect a PC that runs the downloading software to the 4100SM Module as specified in the module s instructions Connect the 4100SM tothe panel s J 2 header Refer to Section 26 Downloading Primer for wiring connections Direct wire downloading can be initiated by following the procedures described in the Compass manual SECTION 13 7820 7835 7835C Long Range Radio In This Section General Information Wiring th
103. NIED Time Window Definitions General e Scheduled events are based on time windows which are simply periods of time during which an event may take place e A time window is defined by a start time and a stop time e Thesystem supports up to 20 time windows e The windows are shared by all 2 partitions and are used when programming the various schedules open close limitation of access as well as for time driven event control 24 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Scheduling Example To understand scheduling take for example a store that has the following hours Monday to Thursday 9am to 6pm Friday 9am to 9pm Saturday 10am to 4pm Sunday Closed Holidays Closed Assume the owner desires the following time windows to allow time for employees to arm or disarm the system Monday to Thursday Open disarm 8am to Yam Close arm 6pm to 6 30pm Friday Open disarm 8am to 9am Close arm 9pm to 9 30pm Saturday Open disarm 9am to 10am Close arm 4pm to 4 30pm Sunday and Holidays Closed To provide these schedules the following five time windows need to be programmed Window Start Stop Purpose 1 8am 9am Monday Friday open window 2 9am 10am Saturday open window 3 4om 4 30pm Saturday close window 4 6pm 6 30pm Monday Thurs close window 5 9pm 9 30pm Friday close window Using the 80 Menu Mode described later in this section the installer can program open close schedules by assigning each time wind
104. NNNNNNNNNNNNNENENENENENENENENENEHEHEHENENN 25 1 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS a a cate 23 15 Level 0 Installer User 1 COdES 0 28 2 OC or OPEN CIRCUIT osses 5 4 Level 1 Master CodesS sesssrirssereerrrrirerenrrrnreenes 28 2 Off Normal RePOrt cccccccc cesses scececsrseeeneres 30 5 Level 2 Manager COdGS ccccccecceeeeessssseeeeeeeeasseeeees 28 2 One Man Fire Wal K TSt ccccccccccccccocccecccecceccecccce 30 2 Level 6 Duress Codes ssssssesessrrrrrresrrnrrrreeerrrenee 28 3 On Line Control FONS 26 2 Levels 3 5 Operator CodesS ssssssessessrrrrrrresrnrreree 28 2 OPEN CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH 23 5 Limitation OA COES Sirain R i 24 3 Open Close REpOrting cccccssssssssesseseseeseesecssseeseeseeeees 28 4 Limitation of Access Schedules 1 speeaettit 24 16 Open Close Reports by Exception sssr 24 5 Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming 24 16 OPEN CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION 23 16 LI NE SEIZE EEST A E re AEE C 1 Open Close Schedule ccssessesseseessessesstessesstssesstesteesen 24 4 List OF FIOUTES mnc ea Deas a a ein Aa viii Open Close Schedule Programming 24 9 Listen In tO FollOW ssessssssssssssrnesssrnrrrsesssrrenee 11 1 11 2 Open Close Schedule Worksheet 24 9 LO BAT oaeo a A a 30 5 Open Close Schedules 24 7 LOBBY PARTITION ssssssrrsssssssrrrrsnensnnnrnnnnnsennenns 23 11 Open Close WINCOWS ccccccccecescssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeess 24 12 LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL 2
105. Scheduling Menu Modeand return to normal operating mode Enter O to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options If O is pressed the TIME WINDOW prompt is displayed 24 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Time Windows The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times These windows are used for various open close and access schedules as well as for output controls and are the basis of the scheduling system These windows are shared among all 2 partitions Time Windows Worksheet The following worksheet will help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of this system before programming the time window definitions for this installation Note that time windows can span midnight Time Window Start Time Stop Time Number HH MM HH MM a S a a B20 o A time window must have a start and a stop time Time Windows Programming Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code 80 The keypad will display the TIME WINDOW prompt Time Window Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows 1Yes O No 0 Time Window Enter the 2 digit time window number 01 20 to be 01 20 00 Quit 01 programmed Press to accept the entry Enter 00 at the TIME WINDOW prompt to quit time window programming and display the QUIT prompt 01 TIME WINDOW If a time window number was entered the cursor will be 00 00AM 00 00AM positioned on the
106. This field is used to enter the alphanumeric paging service phone number for Open Close reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 fora 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS CLOSES This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Open Close reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM This field is used to enter the alphanumeric paging service phone number for System reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for System reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST This field is used to enter the alphanumeric paging service phone number for Test reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces Enter after the last digit of the phone number This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Test reports Enter up to 10 digits If fewer than 10 digits are required enter after the last digit i e pager pin number ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZON
107. UND SCREW VOLTAGE TRIGGERS not supervised I q MAIN DIALER ON HOOK BATTERY TABS THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED e r a BLK RED DETECTOR S IS TO BE USED aeeoo a a CUT 13V J4 KEYPAD PORT 2 CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM FB HOUND Go ke sears nee SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD We me o keypad black wire BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS KEYPAD PORT 2 4 DATA IN 2 to keypad green wire Sa EEE ee ONE ole BLUE Connect to 12V 7AH min 34 4AH max INTACT Supervised using 2k EOLR 123456789 J4 i 5 AUX PWR 2 to keypad red wire INTERFACE TO 5140DLM lead acid batteries using cables supplied CUT Not supervised no EOLR used O00000000 Rating 10 14 VDC Sa SEA Tore Up tee See instructions for required capacity BEELI BELLZ i 400mA max See note 1 THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL 000000000 3 Float charging voltage 13 7VDC Battery Make connections using 7 DATA OUT 2 to keypad yellow wire SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A normally need not be replaced for Wi W4 Se cable Sup lied PINS 2 3 6 8 amp 9 NOT USED POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER at least 3 yrs WHITE WHITE O not supervised E E E cera MAIN Connect GenNAD REMOVABLE pape r BELL OUTPUTS F AUX BEANS KEYPAD PORT 1 ig ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 P ZONES IZON 67 pZONE7 Zone 8 sae ible applied TERMINAL BLOCK KIT 2 909 0 O O OTIO C amp O G2 3 CX C amp Go ee pets ADEMCO NO 4142BLK TD N K N Wa ZONE 4 PHONE
108. VISTA 32FB Commercial Fire and Burglary Partitioned Security System with Scheduling Installation and Set Up Guide ADEMCO OFF AWAY STAY MAX TEST BYPASS INSTANT CODE CHIME READY t PANic ADEMCO K3521 3 99 Recommendations for Proper Protection The Following Recommendations For The Location Of Fire And Burglary Detection Devices Help Provide Proper Coverage For The Protected Premises Recommendations For Smoke And Heat Detectors With regard to the number and placement of smoke heat detectors we subscribe to the recommendations contained in the National Fire Protection Association s NFPA Standard 72 noted below Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows For minimum protection a smoke detector should be installed outside of each separate sleeping area and on each additional floor of a multi floor family living unit including basements The installation of smoke detectors in kitchens attics finished or unfinished or in garages is not normally recommended For additional protection the NFPA recommends that you Install heat or smoke detectors in the living room dining room bedroom s kitchen hallway s attic furnace room utility and storage rooms basements and attached garages In addition we recommend the following e Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where a smoker sleeps e Ins
109. a callback Must be O for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations 157 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM 0 Enter 1 to have the system arm disarm in accordance with the button s user s global arming settings Enter Oif the button is not to be used to global arm the system however home partition arming will still occur 158 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM 0 Enter 1to allow the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones when arming the system When attempting to arm the system the keypad will beep once after pressing the button if any faulted zones are present If this feature is enabled the user should then press the button again within 4 seconds to force bypass those zones and arm the system Enter Oif RF button force bypass is not desired 1 60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION 0 Enter Lif 2 way audio AAV is being used Enter Oif AAV is not being used Must be O for commercial fire and UL 1x70 EVENT LOG TYPES Alm Chck Byps O C Systm Test Enter 1 for each type of event for which event logging is desired Otherwise enter O Default is 100010 171 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 0 Select the type of time stamping desired O standard 12 hour 1 24 hour format Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions 1 72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE MODE 0 Enter 1 to have the printer print events as they occur Enter Oto enable the printer to print the logs only upon request
110. aduas eater tance 16 2 DIALER 2 AL aa eustneisdcenaasatewuenact 16 2 Dialer Operations aaa 16 2 Dialer OUPUT Siuta a acess 16 1 DIALER SEGE CTION eino oi ia 23 19 Dialer Testaan aaa a eens 30 1 DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR ossssssssessssnrnrrrseessrrrrrrrnne C 1 DIP SNIEN OS n a iss zeneacs et ae a aetes 7 2 Direct Wire Downloading cccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 8 Direct Wire Downloading ssssssssessssssrrrrrreessrrrrenee 26 3 DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK essees 23 14 Disarm DEl IVen a 24 2 Disarm Type 22r ai 21 3 Disa MNG ennan hee nda eee eeae cette 29 2 DISPLAY BURG amp PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER PARTIELON Sareea a utube 23 17 Display F aulted Zones ssssssssrnsessrrrrrrreesrrnrrrreeen 29 2 DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS E Shed AEE E E E E T 23 17 DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS23 17 DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES 23 5 DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER ssasssssesssrrrerressrrrrrrrees 23 5 DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER eesse 23 5 OWI OANA ieciiiaititsiaeititrishe vdevneitiesnetaigerd etal 1 6 26 1 Downloading Requirements ccccccessssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 26 1 DUAL REPORTIN Gearrar iie ees 23 7 UL CSS a E N seas 28 2 Duress REPON oeiia a aaa 28 3 Early Power Detect ssss ssssrrrrrrreesrrnrrrreesrrrrrrreeene 13 3 Earth GOUNNG naanin e E N 4 4 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM 23 14 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM 23 14 ENABLE BELL 2 amp AUX RELAY CHIME ANNUNCIATION sorene 23 19 ENABLE BURG
111. aeeaes C 1 S000 Sr ES aaan aadA 8 5 ALARM SOUNDS BELL 1 P E 23 18 SBOOTM Module ssssssrissssssssrrrrrnensssnnrrinrenneennnrrnnenns 8 4 Alarm Saf innecesaria 5 2 5800T M Wiring E E A E E 8 4 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OC CUS eerie 23 16 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM DISARM WINDOW S cer cscieatesonnsticectinstectetbaasestessimdsnasetsoenenees 23 16 lt i oe ee ey ee ee 5 1 ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED nsss 23 8 Antenna F QUIC ccccccssseeceeceesseeeeeeeseeessseaseeesseaaaeees 13 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp Up Guide Arm Disarm COMMANAS ccccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaees 24 12 ANIA WAY TYDG 21 rcniasnnnrananai a 21 3 PRIMING AWAY ciir 29 2 Arming FUN I ONS sesuai aul a aa 29 2 B 1 Armino STAIN auies a e a T a 29 2 Arming M AXIMMUIM aerian i 29 2 AMINO Stay araa N 29 2 ATMS LODD on a a 2 2 ARMS COBB Faresa E 23 11 AMFSTAY TYDE 20rruiinr eaa nrutenadasocandes 21 3 Audio Alarm Ver ifiCatiOn ccccceeceesssssseeeeeeeees 1 5 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections 11 2 Authority Levels and Modification Rules 28 3 AUCO ATMIN Gae iis ierdeay Seslannted aa disatuns 24 1 AUTO DI Sarianna 24 2 AUTOAARM DELAY secsitecscomsiusinieatinineaend 23 16 PUTO SATIN DONA aiso tii tate terete uehauedereveavuate 24 2 AUTO APM WAP eia n n E 24 2 AUTO ARM WARNING PERIOD 23 16 AUTO DISARM DELAY ccccccccesssssseeeeeeeesaeeeeeees 23 16 AUX RELAY FUNCTION SELECTION
112. after the closing window expires Missed Opening Closing type reports are programmed in the Report Code programming section The Exception Reporting option must be set for these to be sent 24 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Scheduling Menu Mode 24 6 The 80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program most of the scheduling and timed event options To enter this mode the system must first be in the normal operating mode all partitions disarmed Enter Installer Code 80 The following can be programmed while in this mode e Define time windows e Assign open close schedules to each partition e Assign holiday schedules e Program time driven events for system functions and relay activation e Assign limitation of access schedules Some scheduling features are programmed in Data Field Programming Mode Installer Code 8 0 O The general Programming Mode scheduling fields are listed below System Wide Fields 1x74 1x75 Relay timeout values 2 01 2 02 Daylight savings time options 2 11 Allow disarming outside window if alarm occurs Partition Specific fields 1 76 Access control relay for this partition 2 05 Auto arm delay value 2 06 Auto arm warning time 2 07 Auto disarm delay value 2 08 Force arm enable 2 09 Open Close Reporting by Exception 2x10 Restrict disarm only during windows Report Code Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide System Group 3 Scheduli
113. al zone faults will be displayed one at a time To display a new partition s status press Pk Partition No The Armed LED on a master keypad will be lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully The Ready LED will be lit only if all partitions are ready toarm Neither LED will be lit if only some partitions are armed and or only some partitions are ready The sounder on a master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions The priority of the sounds is as follows a Pulsing fire alarm sounds b Steady burglar alarm sounds c Trouble sounds rapid beeping Pressing any key on the master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists will silence the sounder A master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1 Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1 and will activate on Partition 1 Therefore panics must be programmed for Partition 1 SECTION 3 False Alarm Reduction Features In This Section General Information Exit Error Logic and Related Reports Recent Close Report Exit Dday Reset Cross Zoning Call Waiting Defeat Logic General Information This control supports features that help minimize false alarms Most false alarms occur upon exiting the premises either due to environmental factors or because the zone s resistance to the control may be on the edge of acceptability Wecall this condition a swinger Features that prevent
114. alarm system i e cannot sense alarms while this test is active The test can only be activated by the installer by entering the I nstaller s Code and pressing 68 while the burglary portion of the system is disarmed This test should be conducted at periodic intervals as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction When this test is first activated the system will display USE BELL DING Enter 1 YES to have the fire bells associated with each 0 NO 1 YES point sound for 3 seconds when a point is faulted Enter 0 NO if only keypad sounders are desired The next prompt will be displayed AUTO TEST DET Enter 1 YES to have the system automatically test all 0 NO 1 YES polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16 Other fire zones will have to be tested manually Enter O NO to test every point manually The next prompt will be displayed For true detector sensitivity tests and for compliance with fire codes O NO must be entered at the AUTO TEST DET prompt LOG RESULTS Enter 1 YES to have the system log each point as it Is 0 NO 1 YES tested A list of untested points will also be logged Enter 0 NO if you do not want the system to keep track of the results The next prompt will only be displayed if Contact ID report format has been selected Chapter 30 Testing TheSysten C S TRANSMIT Enter 1 YES to have the results of the test sent to the 0 NO 1 YES central station This report will co
115. ammed as an entry exit delay door after arming the system without setting off the alarm Enter the exit delay time O1 15 multiplied by 15 seconds or 00 for no delay up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds for zones assigned to Zone Type 01 ENTRY DELAY 2 partition specific fos Entry Delay 2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned to Entry Delay 1 This delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL commercial burglary installations EXIT DELAY 2 partition specific paf Exit Delay 2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned to Exit Delay 1 This delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL commercial burglary installations 23 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 2 13 15 16 17 19 20 22 BELL 1 TIMEOUT partition specific paf Defines the length of time Bell Output 1 and the keypad s sounder will sound for all audible alarms about 1 2 minutes Arm the panel and fault the polling loop zone After the bell timeout expires wait a minute and then disarm the panel The Restore Report is sent to C S while the zone is still faulted KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT of Enter the partition number 1 2 in which the keyswitch is being used Enter 9 if keyswitch is to be used to silence fire bells in the event of a fire alarm Otherwise enter 0 Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop zone 7 is no longer available as protection zone when used
116. and enter the correct data SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS 91 Select partition for programming partition specific fields 92 Display the software revision level of the control panel 93 Enter Menu Mode Programming 94 Go to next page of fields 99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming Mode with no Installer Code lockout 98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout Programming System Wide Data Fields Values for some programming fields are system wide global and some can be different for each partition partition specific Note that the partition specific programming fields are automatically skipped when programming the global fields If the system has only 1 partition the partition specific fields will not be automatically skipped To program system wide data fields do the following 1 2 3 Enter Program Mode Installer code 8 0 0 After the Program Mode has been entered the following will be displayed Program Mode F ill View 00 If the control has not been programmed before enter 97 to load factory defaults Press and enter the first field number to be programmed for example 00 nstaller s Code Make the desired entry When the field is complete the keypad will beep three times and will advance to the next field Enter the desired change or press x and enter the next field number to be programmed First Page of fields 00 90 press 99 or 98
117. and 4285 4286 VIP Module remote access capability The DIP switch settings shown in Figure 11 1 disable remote AAV Module trigger option The control also requires that the AAV Module trigger type is falling edge which is set in DIP switch settings shown 1 685 Receiver software must be rev 4 6 or higher Earlier versions will not hold the phone line connection 2 Contact ID code for Listen in to follow is 606 Contact ID is the only reporting format that will send a listen in to follow Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections Connect the Audio Alarm Verification Module s falling edge trigger input on Eagle Model 1250 to a 4204 Relay Module as shown in Figure 11 1 If also using a 4285 4286 VIP Module be sure to follow the corresponding diagram when making connections Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options 1 With at least one 2 line alpha keypad 6139 6139R wired and set to a proper address temporarily apply power to the system 2 Enter Data Field Programming Mode Installer Code 8 0 0 Program the following data fields 45 PRIMARY DIALER FORMAT Set for 1 Contact ID 1 60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION Set for 1 If more information about actual programming procedures is required see The Mechanics of Programming section 4 Zone5 must be programmed for response type 10 and the EOLR must be removed regardless of whether or not EOLRs have been enabled in field 41 Zone5is no lo
118. ation 2 75 H X 4 W X 1 D Mounts on VISTA 32FB main PC board shield using standoffs supplied Connects to VISTA 32FB main PC board J 3 header using ribbon cable supplied AC398U 62668 M O N 5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE Physical Indicators 4 5 H X 2 75 W X 1 5 D Mounts to single gang electrical box AC Power Comm Failure Dialer 1 Fault and Dialer 2 Fault Connect indicator inputs to VISTA 32FB trigger outputs J 2 header VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 6139 R REMOTE KEYPADS Physical Width 6 25 inches Height 4 75 inches Depth 1 25 inches Electrical Voltage Input 12VDC Current Drain 100mA Interface Wiring RED 12VDC input auxiliary power BLUE Not Used GREEN Data to control panel YELLOW Data from control panel BLACK Ground and connection from supplemental power supply Index 10 Relay MOGC iausscecasescs cov setacuanensceiwsunattunsbetsaueneetiont 29 6 93 Menu Mode Programming ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeaes 20 4 TOUET eee E E 12 5 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT sses 23 14 7820 Long RANGE RACIO ccccceeessseseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeess 13 1 7835 LONG RANGE RACIO ccccccceessssseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeees 13 1 7835C Long Range Radio eseese 13 1 pa Pa EA EEA A E A EEE S 12 5 24 Hour Trouble Type 19 cccceeeceeeeeessssseeeeeeeeeees 21 3 24 hour Audible Alarm Type 07 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 21 2 24 hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 cseeeeeeeeeeees 21
119. bined standby current drawn from aux pwr 1 aux pwr 2 and polling loop cannot exceed 1 0A The combined alarm current drawn from aux pwr 1 aux pwr 2 polling loop bell 1 and bell 2 cannot exceed 2 3A NOTE 2 2k EOLR is Ademco model 610 7 NOTE 3 See instructions on setting addresses amp for max of keypads and wire run length restrictions Keypad color subject to approval of local authority Assembled In Mexico VISTA 32FB SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS connections a S Q N C d Q Q N O 4208U 2k Note 2 2k ZONE 1 8 NOTES e All zones provide Style B supervision e Zone resistance excluding EOLR Zones 1 2 8 100 ohms max Other zones 300 ohms max e Zone response 350 500mS all zones 2k 2k e Ratings for zones 1 2 10 14VDC 2mA max for smoke det up to 16 detectors of the type specified in the instructions can be used e UL compatibility ID A Do not mix fire and burg sensors on one loop N C contacts for burg usage only TO OTHER DEVICES Polling Loop Ratings supervised 128mA max See Note 1 See instructions for compatible devices and for max wire run length The VISTA 32FB Main Dialer Complies with FCC Rules Part 68 FCC Reg No AC398U 68192 AL E Ringer Equivalence 0 7B ADEMCO GROUP 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 Copyright 1999 PITTWAY CORPORATION K3521 3 99
120. bscriber account number or partition number if Contact ID reporting is used Keypad Macros Accommodates 32 keypad macro commands per system each macro Is a series of keypad commands For example by pressing either the A B C or D key the system can be programmed to log onto another partition bypass zones 2 and 3 and arm that partition in the AWAY mode explained in detail later in this manual Characteristics of keypad macros are Can be assigned to the A B and C keys by partition Other macros not assigned to these keys can be executed by using the D key Each macro can be 32 characters keystrokes in length VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Bell Outputs Provides two style Y supervised bell outputs on the control panel itself A 4204CF Relay Module can supply two additional style Y supervised bell outputs Auxiliary Relay Provides a built in Form C relay that can be used for one of the following Alarm activation Trouble supervisory activation 4 wire smoke detector reset Battery saving feature disconnects power from noncritical loads 4 hours after AC power loss Optional Output Relays Accommodates the use of 16 relay outputs using ADEMCO s 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules Each 4204 module provides four Form C relays for general purpose use Each 4204CF provides two style Y supervised bell outputs Relay outputs have the following characteristics Can be programmed to activate in response t
121. can also be programmed partition specific program field 29 which allows the key to be pressed instead of entering the security code when arming the system The security code must always be entered to disarm the system A user code other than the installer code must be programmed for the Quick Arm feature to function User Codes and Levels of Authority Each user of the system can be assigned a level of authority which tells the system what system functions that user is authorized to do A user can have different levels of authority within different partitions In general users can perform most system functions including Test and Chime Modes but certain authority levels restrict disarming bypassing or the assigning of other user codes These restrictions are noted in the descriptions below Use the View Capabilities keypad function to view the partitions and authority levels for which a particular user is authorized These levels are described in the table below in order from highest to lowest ranking 28 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 28 2 Auth Title Level 0 Installer User 1 Codes Programmed in field 00 default 5 1 4 0 Installer Open Close reporting is selected in field 39 Can perform all system functions arm disarm bypass etc but cannot disarm if armed by another code or by Quick Arm Can add delete or change codes of all other authority levels and can select Open Close repo
122. cation for a description of communication formats the types of messages transmitted by the panel and for the dialer programming defaults SECTION 1 7 Event Log Options In This Section General Information Event Log Printer Connections Programming Event Log Options Event Logging Procedures General Information This system has the ability to record up to 224 events of various types in a history log Each event is recorded in one of six categories with the time and date of its occurrence if real time clock is set These categories are Alarm Supervisory check Bypass Open close System conditions Test The log may be viewed Display Mode on an alpha keypad or can be printed Print Mode on a serial printer connected to the system via a 4100SM Serial Interface Module Event Log Printer Connections The VISTA 32F Bs event log can be printed on a local serial printer If used program field 3x19 must be set to 1 This setting overrides the functions selected for INPUT 1 and OUT 2 made in field 3 20 Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J 2 connector using an ADE MCO 4100SM Interface Module as shown in Figure 17 1 17 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 17 2 J2 CONNECTOR 41005M TO AUX PWR 1 OUTPUT NOTE IF EARTH GROUND FAULT SENSING IS ENABLED YOU MAY GET AN EARTH GROUND FAULT INDICATION IF YOU USE A PRINTER OR PC WHICH HAS A 3 PRONG GROUNDED POWER CORD
123. ct next partition Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time 93 Menu Mode Programming 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide is a mode through which much of the system s programming is done It offers main menu selections for the following e Zone Programming e Sequential Mode Programming e Report Code Programming e Alpha Programming e Device Programming e Relay Programming e Relay Voice Descriptors e Custom Index Programming VIP Module substitute words e Clear Serial RF Press O NO or 1 YES in response to the displayed menu selection Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence The keypad will then prompt you with questions regarding the programming of a particular zone or device Refer to 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guideto program each option shown The following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode 93 Menu Mode Key Commands Enters Menu Mode Serves as ENTER key Press to have keypad accept entry Backs up to previous screen oe 1 Press to answer NO Press to answer YES 00 Escapes from Menu Mode back into Data Field Programming Mode if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option 20 4 SECTION 21 Zone Type Definitions In This Section Zone Number Designations Zone T ype Definitions Zone Number Designations The VISTA 32FB supports up to 32 zones of hardwire polling loop and or wireles
124. d by the installer to Suit specific needs e Thereare four sets of pre programmed communication defaults available including Low Speed 4 2 Express ADEMCO High Speed and ADEMCO Contact ID Loading one of these defaults automatically programs industry standard codes that will suit most needs e These defaults can be changed directly from the 6139 R Alpha Keypad or they can be changed by using Compass downloading software be sure that the software version used includes the VISTA 32F B Downloading can be performed either remotely from an IBM compatible computer using an approved modem or at the job site direct wire download using the 4100SM Serial Module 20 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide The factory loaded defaults 97 enable keypad addresses 00 01 only A keypad set to one of these addresses must be used to program the system Entering Data Field Programming Mode Enter Program Mode using either method A or B A Press both the amp and keys at the same time within 30 seconds after power is applied to the control B Enter the Installer Code 8 0 0 The factory installer code can be changed once the Program Mode field 00 has been entered Local keypad programming can be disabled through Compass downloading software If this is done programming can only be accomplished via the downloading software Moving from One Page of Programming to Another The data fields are grouped into four
125. dary number is programmed set the maximum number of dialer re tries to 3 4 or 5 in field 3 21 UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises Local Mercantile Safe and Vault e All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision 41 0 Wireless sensors may not be used If 4190WH RPMs are used set field 24 to 0 to enable tamper detection e Attach a door tamper switch Supplied to the VISTA 32FB cabinet backbox For safe and vault installations a back box tamper switch not supplied must also be attached to the backbox Also see Mounting the Cabinet in Section 4 Installing the Control e Wirean ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell Box to the bell output Bell wires must be run in conduit Program the bell output for 16 or longer timeout and for confirmation of arming ding Also see Section 14 External Sounders e Wirethe VISTA 32FB tamper switch and AB12 Bell Box tamper switches to any EOLR Supervised zone zones 1 8 Program this zone for day trouble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems e Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above For Grade A Service e You may use the VISTA 32FB dialer alone or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone e When using the dialer program it to send Burglary Alarm Low
126. de A Mercantile Premises Listing ccseeeeeeeees 4 2 Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing 4 3 Pade A SCM VI CO aa ANa E A 2 Grade AA S PVICC cccceecsecceeecsssssseeeeeeesssanaeeeeees A 2 A 3 HANDSHAKE waicwcist te cirstars tind oe Pealeasitva TO 25 1 Holiday schedule dnssianand a 24 4 Holiday Schedule Programming ssssssssessesssrrrerrees 24 10 Holiday Schedule Worksheet ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 10 Holiday schedules sssesssssnrnnsessrrnrrrrressrnrrrrressrnnn 24 7 House D Sniffer Mode sssssssssssssssrrrrrreesrrrrrrrressrnnn 8 4 How To Use THIS Manual sssssssssssssressessrrrrrrreessrrrrrnne iX HASEN S rinon a a N 30 5 IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER n 23 3 Installer Code s s sesssresessrrrresrrrrresrrrrresrrrrresrrrrresnn 28 2 INSTALLER CODE zsido Merenech aan terete tanstncs 23 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Installing the Cabinet LOCK ccccccscsssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 4 1 MAIN DIALER TOUCH TONE OR ROTARY DIAL Installing the Contr Olisannsiiani E Sitgrantout ascii ea te hs Gti uate au osm Dena outa dun bide neaURIgacNApONaTT Aas 23 4 Installing the Control s Circuit Board l 4 3 Maintenance Signal SUPPOrt cceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 1 2 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING ees 23 3 MANAGE COJE rresia an ETE 28 2 Interior W Delay Type 10 ou cceeeeeceeeessessseeeeeeeeeens 21 2 Manual Relay Activation MOde ccccccccesssssseeeeeees 29
127. deactivation of each individual relay SWITCH 4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS OFF on POSITION means OFF 4 DIP SWITCH TYPICAL FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS SHOWN OFF AND ENABLING DISABLING TAMPER COVER TAMPER REED SWITCH 4 PIN KEYPAD PLUG EITHER OR BOTH CAN BE USED T1 4 DATA IN FROM CONTROL GROUND DATA OUT TO CONTROL 12V Figure 9 la 4204 Relay Module 9 2 Section 9 Raday Outputs SWITCH 4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS POSITION means OFF ALARM POLARITY SHOWN a DIP SWITCH NOTIFICATION EACH OUTPUT FOR SETTING DEVICE APPLIANCE B PROVIDES ADDRESS AND 2K EOLR STYLE Y ENABLING DISABLING 610 7 SUPERVISION TAMPER EACH OUTPUT POLARIZED RATED 1 2A MAX COVER TAMPER REED SWITCH NOTIFICATION USE APPLIANCE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 4 PIN CONSOLE PLUG QOOOODOOOO V NOTIFICATION COMPATIBLE APPLIANCE A WITH EITHER OR BOTH O 2K EOLR APLANO E CAN BE USED O 610 7 Selo POWER SUPPLY TB1 VOLTAGE RATING O O POWER FOR NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B DATA IN A TRO 8 28VDC OR VFW UP TO 2 4A FROM CONTROL DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT GROUND SRSA SUAS ANE DATA OUT POWER LIMITED TO CONTROL 12V SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE CIRCUITRY INCLUDING NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE RELAY COILS CURRENT DRAIN AT 12V IS 25 mA 80 mA PER ACTIVE OUTPUT Figure 9 1b 4204CF Relay Module 9 3 VISTA
128. ding a user the system will only prompt for Open Close reporting capability if the user is being added by the Installer When a Master or Manager adds a new user the new user s Open Close reporting enable will be the same as that of the Master or Manager who is adding the user If Open Close reports are required to be selectable by the Master or Manager the Installer should assign two Master or Manager user codes one with Open Close reporting enabled and one without Note that Open Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 02 is enabled for Open Close reporting and that Quick Arm reports as User 00 In order for Quick Arm reports to be sent for all partitions User 02 must have authority and Open Close must be enabled for all partitions If a code with access to all partitions is not desired it is suggested that User 02 be assigned authority level 5 in all partitions and that the code be kept secret Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system unless armed by that user ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 01 75 uniquely If any other report format is used only user numbers 01 15 can uniquely report to the central station Users 16 75 will report as User 15 Multiple Partition Access Examples Each user is programmed for a primary home partition A user can also be given access to operate one or more additional partitions Within each partition each user may be programmed to have different levels of authority
129. dule Connections Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options U L The Audio Alarm Verification AAV feature is not UL Listed General Information An Audio Alarm Verification AAV Module also known as two way voice such as the Eagle 1250 is an add on accessory that permits voice dialog between an operator at a central station and a person at the alarm installation for the purpose of alarm verification This feature is supported only if Alarm reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone number Make connections from Eagle 1250 Module terminals 1 and 3 on the Relay Out connector to the control s zone 5 terminals 22 and 23 The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the sounders at the premises It is also used to postpone noncritical dialer reports while the AAV session is in progress Note that zone 5 is then no longer available as a protection zone When using the AAV zone 5 must be assigned a zone response type e g response type 10 and option 1x60 must be enabled to silence sounders on the premises AAV Module Operation After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary phone number the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages was an Alarm report If Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone number and a Cancel report code is enabled the control will send a Listen in to Follow message Event Code 606 which signals the 685 rev 4 6 or hig
130. e 8 Use zone 8 for connection of compatible 2 wire latching type glassbreak detectors Wireas follows 1 Connect all detectors in parallel across zone 8 terminals 26 and 27 See Figure 6 3 Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals The EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last detector GLASSBREAK DETECTOR LATCHING TYPE GLASS BREAK DETECTOR LOOP Figure 6 3 Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 After an alarm the first code OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system the second code OFF clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak detector Compatible Glassbreak Detectors Use detectors that meet the following ratings Standby Voltage 5VDC 13 8VDC Standby Resistance Greater than 20k ohms equivalent resistance of all detectors in parallel Alarm Resistance Less than 1 1k ohms see note below Alarm Current 2MA 10mA ThelEl 735L Series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these ratings Up to 50 IEI 735L detectors may be connected in parallel e The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one glassbreak detector in the alarmed state e Do not use other N O or N C contacts when using glassbreak detectors on zone 8 Other contacts may prevent proper glassbreak detector operation 6 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide You can use detectors that exceed 1
131. e Long Range Radio to the Control Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio T rouble Messages General Information The control can support the 7820 7835 or 7835C Long Range Radio LRR All messages programmed to be sent via the phone lines may also be enabled to be sent via the LRR These messages will be transmitted in Contact I D format regardless of the format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47 It is recommended that Contact ID format is used for the main dialer if possible If Contact ID is not used certain types of reports such as Listen in to Follow 606 will not be sent at all Supervision of the LRR The data lines between the control and the LRR as well as certain functions in the radio can be supervised If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs both the LRR and the control s dialer to the central station can be programmed to send a Trouble message Note For complete information see the Installation Instructions that accompany the radio Operation of the LRR TheLRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber ID in fields 58 and 59 The reporting categories are Alarms Troubles Bypasses Openings Closing System Events and Test In addition within an enabled category the specific event must be enabled for dialer reporting If for instance zone 10 Is enabled to report but zone 11 is not zone 10 will report via the LRR but zone 11 wi
132. e Pole of the Aux Relay Terminal 8 to the Power side of the smoke detector Connect the side of the smoke detector to Aux Power Terminal 12 Observe proper polarity when connecting detectors see Figure 6 2 Power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device use a System Sensor A77 716B EOL Relay Module connected as shown in Figure 6 2 6 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Pa AUXILIARY RELAY EOL POWER SUPERVISION RELAY 4 WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS MODULE A77 716B CON I ROL PANEL N SHOWN POWERED RELAY OPENS WHEN POWER IS LOST 20002 EOLR HEAT DETECTOR Figure 6 2 4 Wire Smoke Detector Connections Zones 1 8 2 Connect detectors including heat detectors if used across terminals of the zone selected See Figure 6 2 All detectors must be wired in parallel Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals The EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last detector Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors Use any UL Listed 4 wire smoke detector that is rated for 10 14VDC operation and has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds Some compatible 4 wire smoke detectors are listed below Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2412 Photoelectric w heat sensor direct wire System Sensor 2412TH lonization direct wire System Sensor 1412 Fire Alarm Verification for Smoke Detectors This feature
133. e keyswitch Enter Oif reporting is not desired NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR ZONES 3 8 0 Enter 0 if end of line resistors are to be used Enter 1 if end of line resistors are not to be used in which case only normally closed devices must be used Must be O for commercial fire and UL installations 23 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 6 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 DIAL TONE PAUSE 0 This field sets the time the system will wait for dial tone before dialing Applies if true dial tone is not selected in field 43 or the dial tone is not actually detected Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows Enter single digit 0 5 seconds 1 11 seconds or 2 30 seconds Must be O for commercial fire and UL installations DIAL TONE DETECTION 1 Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before dialing or if it will wait for a predetermined delay before dialing delay is programmed in Dial Tone Pause field 42 The latter may be necessary in high noise environment telco networks where noise can be confused with dial tone resulting in premature dialing Enter 1 for true dial tone wait If no dial tone is detected control will dial at end of pause programmed in field 42 Enter Oto pause for seconds entered in field 42 then dial RING DETECTION COUNT pof Only applicable if using a 4285 4286 VIP Module and or if station initiated downloading will
134. e open and will de activate four hours after the start of an AC power failure Using this feature noncritical loads Such as Supplementary keypads that do not need to be supported for the full 24 hour battery backup period can be disconnected from the auxiliary outputs allowing a smaller capacity battery to be used The relay re activates within a few seconds after AC power restores 4 WIRE SMOKE DETECTORS CONTROL PANEL S N SHOWN POWERED T RELAY OPENS WHEN POWER IS LOST 15 27 HEAT DETECTOR Four Wire Detector Circuit Figure 15 2 Auxiliary Relay Used for Resetting 4 Wi re Smoke Detectors 15 2 SECTION 16 Dialer Outputs In This Section Diale Outputs Available T deohone Line Connections T deohone Line Supervision Diale Operation Dialer Outputs Available The VISTA 32FB provides one main built in dialer for communication to the central station and one optional 5140DLM Backup Dialer both supervised for voltage and current on the phone lines Telephone Line Connections Connect the main dialer and backup dialer if used outputs to telephone company lines that provide loop start service using the RJ 31X Cables supplied Do not connect to telephone company lines that provide ground start service The 5140DLM Backup Dialer mounts to the main PCB shield and connects to the main PCB J 3 connector using a ribbon cable supplied with module as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram at the end of th
135. e the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary load on the panel s power supply use the Auxiliary Current Draw Worksheet in Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Notes Do not use the 4197 module Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions Do not connect 4297 modules in series Input Polling Loop CONTROL 4297 Input Loop Limits Extension Loop Limits 128mA max No more than 64mA Same as for the input polling loop on any individual wire run No individual wire run may exceed Gauge Length Combined Input and Extension Polling Loop Limits No more than 120 devices combined Total length of all wire runs on all loops combined can not exceed 6400 ft 3200 ft if using unshielded wire in 2400 ft conduit or shielded wire Total length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft 2000 ft if using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire Extension Polling Loop Figure 7 2a Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module Notes Do not use 4197 module Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions Do not connect 4297 modules in series Extension Loop 1 Input Polling L
136. e the wire to the ground post 2 Runa l6AWG wire from this post to the panel s earth ground terminal terminal 30 Use a second green nut Supplied to secure this wire to the ground post This method of connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 transformer and panel are connected to different earth ground systems Backup Battery Calculations 19 2 In the event of an AC power loss the VISTA 32F B must be supported by a 12VDC 7AH min 34 4 max sealed lead acid battery As shipped the VISTA 32FB enclosure can house up to 14AH batteries i e two 7AH batteries wired in parallel The optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit may be used to house up to 34 4 AH batteries The battery s capacity must be sized to provide 4 hours commercial burglary installations 24 hours local or central station commercial fire installations or 60 hours remote station commercial fire installation of standby time followed by 5 minutes commercial fire installations or 15 minutes commercial burglary installations of alarm time This can be determined as follows 1 If using the polling loop fill out the Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet Shown below to determine the total current 2 Fill out the Total Control Panel Load Worksheet Shown below to determine the total Standby and alarm load drawn from the control panel s internal 12V power supply 3 Fill out the Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet following the other worksh
137. e yeeinatis ad aia A A 1 WEE S64 NF PA LOCANF I Cinania N A 1 UL864 NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire ccccceccecccccssssseceeeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeseeeessaaseeeessaaes A 1 UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises Local Mercantile Safe And Vault cceeccccessssseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeees A 2 UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar AlArlin cccccccccssssececccsesseeeecceueeeeeeseseeaseecessaeaseeeessusaeeeeesseaessagaess A 2 UL611 UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm cccccccsssseecccsssseceeeceeesececeseseeseseeessueaseeeessuaaeeeeessaageesagagss A 2 California State Fire Marshal CSFM Requirements ccccccccecsesseeeeecseesseeeeseeeseeeeesseaaueeeessaaseeeeessageeeeess A 3 Appendix B Summary of System CommandsS sscssccessseesseeeeeenssensseeeeeeesennnseeeeeeeennnaseeeeeeessnnaaseeeenessnaaasess B 1 Appendix C SDESCIEICAU ONS sivicdvnsssucnuccundaicddavsdsdscdudunasaccuuevnususaueduncsinrndensuadeauceuudsuaedesuuaunsdudsnausweudadnududendsaatnaeni C 1 NON cn Index 1 List of Figures Figured L Installing TNS LOCK ossa ASNE 4 1 Figure 4 2 Cabinet Attack Resistance CONSICGELALIONS ccccccssssececcceesseceeeceeseeeeeeeeauseeeeeessaaeeeeessaaeseeesaaeeeesenas 4 2 Figure 4 3 Mounting the PC Board cccccccsssssceccessssceeeceeseceeecsesseceeesseseceecssagseeeeseeaeeeessseaaecessageeessssesseeesenes 4 3 Figure 5 1 Keypad Connections to Keypad Port 1 ccccceccccccccesseeeeeeceessee
138. eae 29 5 PAT COS an es Vacca NE A ta heade saan E 1 2 Perimeter Type 03 cccccccssseceeeessssssseeeeesssssaaseeeeeeeseas 21 2 Peripheral D VICES ccccsceceeeessesssseeeeeeessseeaseeeeeeeeseas 1 3 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING EAN AEE E E A Snes duasamenseeet aus 23 13 Phone Access User s Guide sssssssssrrrrrreserrrrrenee 10 1 Planning a Partitioned System ssssssssessesssrrrrrreesn 2 1 PEE OUR OM EOK iaraa en unanseateries 13 3 Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet sc 19 3 Polling LOOP EXPANSION ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 7 1 Polling LOOP Supervision ssssssssessessssrrereressrrrrrrees 7 5 Polling Loop Wire RUNS s sssssssssessessrrrrrrreesrrrrrrresene 7 2 PONG FaU Gne a e e AE 30 6 Power Unattalned eero a a 13 3 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE ceee 23 3 Power U p Procedurre cccccccccecsssssssseeeeeesssssseeeeeeeeeas 19 1 PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS 23 5 PRIMARY FORMAT oirionn 23 6 PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER cccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 4 PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT F c 23 4 PRINTER BAUD RAT Exicewedenicc nested 23 15 Printer Configurations ssssssssessesssrrrrrreesrrrrrrrees 17 2 Programming Audio Alarm Verification 11 2 Programming ComMmmMmandS ssssssseseessrrrrrrreesrrrrrrrees B 2 PROGRAMMING COMMANDS eessen 20 3 Programming for 4100APG sesssssssssssesssrrrrrreessrrrrenne 18 3 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields 20 3 Programming Scheduling Opti
139. ecaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution User should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 AVIS L tiquette du minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communications Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l entreprise utilis s pour un service individuel a la ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est pos
140. ecceesseceecesesseeeeseneaseeeecsesaeceeesseaseeeeessaaseeesessaeeeensaageeeess 14 2 ProorammNo CAE Bel OUTOUES micena EE 14 3 SECtION 15 AUXIHary FR SLAY sisiuscaiaduwsisantacanacsssaeusassascuwtunsssansanevanseptuanaenseuasaddaveususndacsusaanubiucisunnisdaneaneastivadensnes 15 1 RELAY EF UN CLIONS ereta 15 1 SECTION 16 Dialer OUCOUES wiisisissvisasesiasndcuptucustavedevanspaasagusnsuntaventudnacaveusuanepauensssnsduatasuancbauewadsastisdaneaneduiavaneuneNs 16 1 Dialer Outputs A Vall Al C senn a paiva neh avaiveden neuer eee ere 16 1 Telephone Line ConnecllonSiasisusciniwnsneiicinanis tian aise A 16 1 Telephone Line SUD Sr Vi SION ena sins shines A din wiitdadosataysinlvags eitousang N a gon 16 1 Dieter ODE a Oeean E E A T 16 2 Section 17 Event Log Option siei a aaa 17 1 Geter al EOF Mat O enen ARAA S T 17 1 Event tog Printer CmnmneTtionS ases 17 1 Programming EVENE LOG ODU ON Serioa a a a a N aro lakes 17 3 Event Logging Procedures serrure AN A AR a i 17 3 Section 18 4100APG Pager Inter faC sisii iiinn naaa aaao aaa eaaa aa daaa aa aaae 18 1 General ALOE MACON erna aR AA A T 18 1 YF OLIVE LGC EL OUAP G re 18 1 Witting thea LOOA PG cisn ssrsieern van dunss vertasaerainimun nea aaarei neta nnuie add eda and ay Hanan anaNed 18 2 Programming the Control for the PagEf cccssscccccsssseceeceeesseeeecesseceeeceeuseceeesseuaecesessauaeseeeesseuseeeseeeestsaagaes 18 3 AITOA PG LED MaGIGAtlOnS aa bar Gaeehae sa onaeeas nanan eaiaainiue S
141. ection for a computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer 26 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Remove the alphanumeric pager interface if it is installed while performing the direct wire download It may be reconnected once the direct wire download is completed 4100SM J2 CONNECTOR TO TO TERM 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AUX PWR 1 QOOOOOQO0OO0OO0OO WPT Henny So 4142TR CABLE RED BLUE WHITE 10 FT SUPPLIED NOTE ENTER THE INSTALLER WITH 4100SM CODE 5 TO INITIATE DOWNLOADING BEFORE MAKING THE ABOVE CONNECTIONS TO AVOID TRIGGERING A FAULT ON INPUT 1 DOWNLOADING P Figure 25 1 Direct Wire Downloading Connections 26 4 SECTION 27 Setting the Real Time Clock In This Section General Information Setting the Time and Date General Information This system provides a real time clock which must be set in order for the system s event log to keep track of events by time and date It must also be set in order to execute scheduling programs time driven events Use a 6139 Alpha Keypad to set the real time clock or set the clock via the downloader software Only users with Installer or Master authority level can set the real time clock Setting the Time and Date 1 Enter Installer or Master Code 63 Typical display shows TIME DATE THU 12 01 AM 01 01 90 2 The day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered Time and date
142. ectly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Includes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is nonsupervised and can accept closed circuit sensors only cannot be used in UL installations 4278E X SN Vplex Quad PIR e Quad element PIR with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop e DIP switch programmable e ncludes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications e Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is nonsupervised and can accept closed circuit sensors only cannot be used in UL installations e Serial ID number preprogrammed no Special programmer required Vplex Relay Module Serial ID number preprogrammed Form C relay output rated 2A 28V One 10k EOLR supervised zone input a Photoelectric Smoke One piece photoelectric smoke detector Detector Devices with built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192SDT Photoelectric Smoke One piece photoelectric smoke detector Detector w Heat with 135 F 57 C heat detector and built Detector in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192CP lonization Smoke One piece products of combustion 4192CPM Detector ionization detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192CPM provides maintenance signals VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Compatible Polling Loop Devices continued Photoelectric Smoke Detector 5192SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector with
143. eeds 1 amp additional keypads can be powered from a regulated 12VDC power supply e g Alarm Saf Model AS PS5 BF S 12 UL Usea UL Listed battery backed supply for UL installations Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 5 2 using the keypad wire colors shown Be sure to observe the current ratings for the power supply used Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown in Figure 5 2 Make no connection to the keypad blue wire if it is present on the control 5 2 e Be sure to connect the negative terminal on the power supply unit to terminal 12 AUX Section 5 Installing The Keypads SUPPLEMENTARY POWER SUPPLY 4 QS COMMUNICATOR TERMINAL STRIP AUX AUX DATA DATA UT QO 0 OY is IMPORTANT Make connections directly to screw terminals Make no connection to the keypad blue wire if present TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE TO KEYPAD RED WIRE TO KEYPAD RED WIRE TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE Figure 5 2 Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Keypads Mounting the Keypads Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user Refer to the instructions provided with the keypad for the mounting procedure K eypads can either be surface mounted or flush mounted using the 6139TRK Trim Ring Kit Refer to the mounting instructions and template included with the keypad and or trim ring kit for specif
144. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 1 5 COND GSS ee oiirs sess een es tdecisl wer Praeses iad tee eedeentissvaevtevads 26 1 Compass Downloading Software cccccceeeeeeeeeees 26 3 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors ccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 3 Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors ccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 4 Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters 8 6 Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices 14 2 Compatible Glass Break Detectors ccccssseeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 Compatible Polling LOOP DeVICES cccccesssseeeeeeeees 7 6 CONTACT ID EVENT CODES 25 6 Contacting Technical SUPPOMIt cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 6 GOSS ZONING areresoss tsa eccncen A 3 2 CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 11 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE ccceeceseeseseeeeeeeeeeees 23 11 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE 23 11 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO ccccccccssetsseeeeeeeeeeees 23 11 Gross ZONING asrotety carrot Gaetan 1 6 Dalai MG YOclOn oc siiteteh ciate aa atta siahckiine 26 3 Data Field De SCriPtiOns ccccccccsssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 1 Data Field Program MOde cccccccssssssseeeessssssseeeeees 20 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END MONTH 23 15 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END WEEKEND E Seana caus toes Seana nace ia E E uaata 23 15 DELAY FOR ZONE TYPES 17 amp 18 cceeeeeeees 23 18 DIAL TONE DETECTION sian eesti a enueies 23 6 DIAL TONE PAUSE ose acces iace ceca teva veered uaieda tate 23 6 DIAL Rel AW LV vscinits bccosestainicitc
145. eeeeeeeeeees 17 1 Ademco Contact D ou ccccccccssssseeeeeeeessssseeeeeees 20 1 25 3 4197 Polling Loop Extender ccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 ADEMCO CONTACT D sitecccceteemnecucienbaimonscematesotanians C 1 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules 9 1 Ademco High Speed ccccccccsssssseceeesesssasseeeeees 20 1 25 1 4285 4286 VIP MOdUIC csseseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeseeseseeeees 10 1 ADEMCO HIGH SPEED eeecccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeaseaeaes C 1 4297 Polling Loop Extender cccccscssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 Ademco High Speed Reporting csssscceessssesseeeeees 25 3 4 Wire Smoke Detectors ssssssssreseessrrrrereeesrrrrrrrees 6 3 Ademco Low Speed sssssssrrrssesrrnrrrrressrnrreeee 20 1 25 1 ADEMCO LOW SPEED seasvsisnecusssrssstanioneteressetaiunteane C 1 Ademco No N6277 Cam LOCK ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 1 Ademco s Contact 1D cccccsssseeceessseeeeeeseseeeeseneaeeees 25 2 ATIOCES L ODDY userin aE a 2 2 5140DLM SUCPOPOROCOCECUOCUOUOEOCCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO CSE ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 16 1 AFFECTS LOBBY S E ee ee EE E 23 11 5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE wees C 1 Agengy LISTINGS cccscccesssssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeas 1 6 C 1 S140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE sssssssssrsrsssrssn C 1 PGCNCY Statements sacatctscesstvetneucevertensereescestesaeeneaveqonest A 1 5140LED Indicator Module sssssssrriireeeeee 12 1 12 4 Alarm POWE ooccceccescceccecesesceccceeceesceeseeseeesaesesesarensee
146. eeeeess 7 1 Wiring Adadressing RPM DEVICES caiacicssaaiinniacaaainiaainsey auaranmegouas a noes 7 2 POWLAGIE OOD SUDEV STON ii E AT 7 5 Programming PFOINnNg Loop ZON CS semin A RAE 7 5 Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop ZONGES cccsssececccsssseceeccseseceeceeauseeeeeseeaueceeeseauseceseesaaseeeeessaeesssaaaeeeess 7 5 COMPAE DIG ONNING OCOD CVICES Aaka ena E vias vier va nipaivaaaeiunsnseaiuaia i nda tavesrieemveepeigalees 7 6 Section 8 Wireless Zone EXPANSION sivsccincsscsicduesscviecsedscusccdscncdcccanduscecncdsauuesnusndeessuadddsuccnudsdsucnnussendiaudsuddadauss 8 1 Common Characteristics Of Wireless Zones cccccsssecccccssssececccsesseceeeesauseceessuauseceesesagaeeeseseagaesessssaaaeessaaseeeess 8 1 Wireless Systems AV alll ADIGscas cic cies iia A ss annie taints aaa A naan eas a 8 1 RF System Operation and SUPE VISI ON sis siissiidinsdissinsieeivinnddieaiscivationl sa etavevivarsoltoavsanscntedivuiderbevievananervenieunete 8 2 RF Systeam Stall OM A GVISORICS sre tuseseai lasted orale A A nts 8 3 Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF ReECEIVEMIS ccccccssssecccccsesseeeecceeeseeececsaseeeeeessaasseeeessuaeeeeessaeeesssagases 8 3 installing tne 5800T M MOU ey icsiciiwntenrdaieaadn enim inaoten ann E 8 4 FROUSE TD SPSL OCC scsisctslerte us Suicunstassiinisawealatvnnesioest ais cucestel snip tinaia elves bed insisted tania oadiawhehudaiag ander veeemahaats 8 4 5600 SEn Transmitter SetU a cisatsacsshscanesiesiwcrsins aa sa
147. eeesaaseeeeeeeaseeeeesseaaceeeeseaeeeeeesaaeeesssaaagees 2 5 Section 3 False Alarm Reduction Features 1ssssccsssssssscssnsssescesnsssseeesnnssesennnsseseesnesseseennssssensnesssssesssessans 3 1 CSET a inne tan Lela i E E AE A E A EEE E E as ent 3 1 Exit Error Logic and Related ReportsS essssssessrrrrresrrrrrnesrrrrresrnrrrrssrrrrresrnrrresrnrtrrrrnrnrrrrnnrrrtosrenrnrrreennrenent 3 1 PCC CISS REDO Taense EEIE 3 2 EKIDI RE Se E EE ERA EE EAE REEE EE EE 3 2 FR SZ nN E PAE E A E E AE A E A E E une 3 2 Call Waiting Defeat LOO 1G viessiusioneesansinectcunsnsiteoinaieian vont aid ra 3 3 Section 4 Installing The COME Ol siesissdedsacicdnnsieniststancevarevnncavasdatandnisdanievinanauaendesuieueddasaunduvuivadeudmnneieansinianenens 4 1 MOUNTO Ele CONT OL GSD ICG a E a aa une rae 4 1 installing the Cabinet LOCK issiran saan evan naan atone AAEN AEEA RO TRAAN AAAA AE AAN E ENEA REENA DAREA EARANN RAREN 4 1 Grade A Mercantile Premises LIStiING ccccccssssseeeccessseceeeceeseeceeeceesseceeeeseuseceeessausecesessaaaeeeesssaaeesstsaseeeeeeas 4 2 Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault LIStING cccccccccsssseeeeceeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeuueeeeeeseeaseeeeeseaaeeeessaagessaaseeeseeas 4 3 Installing the Control s Circuit Board ccccccsssececccsssseeecceeesseeeeeceeeaseeeecseuseeeeeseaueceeeessageceeessagasesaseeeesseageees 4 3 Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery cccccccccsssseccccceeseeceeceeseseeeeesseaseceseeseaseces
148. eeeseeeeeeeeseneaseeeesseeaseeeeseaaessseseeeseeas 5 2 Figure 5 2 Using a Supplementary Power Supply for KeypadS cc cseseeececeesseeeeeceesseceesseeueeeessseeaeeeeesseegeas 5 3 Figure 6 1 2 Wire Smoke Detector Connected tO ZONE 1 ccccccesseecccccseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceueaeeeeeeseeaeeeeessaaneeeeeseeeneeas 6 2 Figure 6 2 4 Wire Smoke Detector Connections ZONES 1 8 sesssrereesrrrrresrrrrrrnsrrrrrnsrrrrrensrrrrrenrrrrrerreene 6 4 Figure 6 3 Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 cccccsssseeeeeceeseeeeeceeeseceeeceeeeseeeeessaaeeeessssaneeeeas 6 5 Figure 7 1 Polling Loop CONNECTIONS ccccseeeccccceseeeeeeceeseeeeeeeueueeeeeeeaeseeeeeeseeaeeeeesseaaeeeeesseueessaaeeeesssaeeeesenas 7 3 Figure 7 2a Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender M Odule ccccsceccecssssseeeeeeessseeeeeseeseeeees 7 4 Figure 7 2b Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender M OdUI S ccccccsssseeeeesesseeeeeeeeseeeeseeaeaes 7 4 Figure 8 1 5881 RF Receiver cover removed ssssccccceessseeeeceeseceeceeeuseceeseeaaaeeesseeagseeeeseesageeeeesaeeseseaseeesenas 8 3 Figure 9 la 4204 Relay Module ssssessssnsnssrrrrrsrnrrrrssrrrrrnsrnrnrnssnrrrrnsrnrrrrnnsnnrrrennnrtrtnnntrnonnnronnnrnnnnnnrnnnennrneent 9 2 Figure 9 1b 4204CF Relay MOdUule ccccccsssscceccessseceecesesseceeceseseeeeseeaeeeeeseeaeeeeessesaeceeessaggeseeteaseeeessseseeeseees 9 3 Figure 10 1 4285 4286 VIP Modu
149. een enabled for 0 NO 1 YES arming disarming functions and is not assigned to a user this prompt will appear Press O NO or 1 YES Enter Button ZN If the answer to the RF button question is yes the zone number 001 032 for the button will be requested Enter any one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY STAY or DISARM The system will then assign all buttons of the transmitter to this user number Multi Access Press O NO if the user is to have access to this partition only 0 NO 1 YES Press 1 YES if the user is to have access to more than one partition If NO the program exits this mode If YES the keypad prompts for the Global Arm option for this user Global Arm Press O NO or 1 YES depending on whether the user will be 0 NO 1 YES allowed to arm more than one partition via Global Arm prompts described in Section 30 Keypad Functions The keypad now prompts for the user s access to the next 28 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide partition Part 2 SHOP Press O NO or 1 YES depending on whether this user will 0 NO 1 YES have access to the displayed partition number If NO the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in sequence If YES the keypad prompts for the following e User s authority level in the displayed partition see Authority Level prompt above e Open Close option for this user in the displayed partition See Open Close pr
150. eets to determine the required capacity for the back up battery Select one of the batteries given in the Battery Selection Table later in this section which has a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated battery Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet Refer to the Polling Loop Expansion section for device restrictions for fire and burglary usage 4208U 8 Zone RPM 27 3mA Low mode 1 0mA 4191WH 4191SN WH 1 0mA The total current cannot exceed 128mA If total load exceeds 128mA then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used This module is powered from the panel s auxiliary power and provides a separate polling loop output which can support an additional 128mA load Note that the total number of polling loop points connected to the panel cannot exceed 32 Total Control Panel Load Worksheets To calculate the total current for the Aux Power 1 Aux Power 2 Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs and polling loop current multiply the each device s standby and or alarm current by the number of units used 1 Enter devices used AUX POWER 1 OUTPUT Total Current on Aux Power 1 output calculate standby and alarm currents then add to get Aux Power 1 current subtotal Device Model Device Current X ofUnits Standby Alarm Aux Power 1 Output Subtotal terminals 11 and 12 1 0A max 1 7A max 19 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 2 Enter devices used AUX POWER 2 OUTPUT
151. elephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved There are no user serviceable components in this product and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs This equipment is hearing aid compatible When programming or making test calls to an emergency number briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late e
152. elnstalle Battery Test Dialer Test When AC power is present the VISTA 32FB will run a brief battery test every 60 seconds to determine if there is a battery connected and will run an extended battery test every 24 hours to check on the battery s condition If the VISTA 32F B finds that the battery voltage is low less than approximately 11 5V during one of these tests it initiates a keypad SYSTEM LOBAT display and a rapid console beeping sound It also sends a Low Battery report to the central station if the dialer feature is used The console can be cleared by entering any security code OFF and a Restore report will be sent to the central station after a Subsequent test indicates that the problem disconnected or low battery has been corrected If used the PS24 will alsorun a brief battery test every 60 seconds to check that a battery is connected and will run an extended battery test every 17 hours to check the actual battery condition If the PS24 finds the battery voltage low less than approximately 23V it will open circuit its LOW BATTERY output Besureto wire this output to one of the VISTA 32F Bs EOLR supervised zones zones 3 8 program for 24 hour trouble response zone type 19 sothat the VISTA 32FB will initiate the required local annunciation and dialer reports The VISTA 32FB may be programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a central station at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per 999 hours
153. em Sensor 1400 Photoelectric w heat System Sensor 2100T sensor direct wire lonization w B401B base System Sensor 1451 Photoelectric w B110LP System Sensor 2151 base Photoelectric duct detect System Sensor 2451 w DH400 base Photoelectric w heat sensor System Sensor 2451TH Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2100 and B401B base These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the VISTA 32FB and are the only 2 wire smoke detectors that may be used Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 8 UL When programmed for fire warning usage all zones can monitor 4 wire smoke detectors zone types 9 16 N O fire alarm initiating devices zone types 9 17 or N O sprinkler system supervisory devices zone type 18 The installer may use as many 4 wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel s Auxiliary Power 1 output without exceeding the output s rating See Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure for auxiliary power ratings Auxiliary power to 4 wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm It must therefore be momentarily interrupted using the built in auxiliary relay as described below This allows the detectors to be reset via the second entry of a User Code OFF sequence Field 3 61 Aux Relay Function must be programmed as a 2 1 Connect 12 volt power for the detectors as follows Wire the side of Auxiliary Power Terminal 10 tothe N C contact of the Aux Relay Terminal 9 Wire th
154. en set to the zone mode and 7835 Tranceiver when set to the zone mode Note that not all of these triggers are available for all settings of field 3x20 See Figure 12 1 J 2 Pin Assignments and Functions shown earlier for configuration of the J 2 triggers The open close fire alarm fire supervisory burglary audible panic alarm silent panic duress alarm and trouble triggers are common to all partitions and must be enabled for each partition data field 2x20 The open close trigger is LOW when all enabled partitions are 12 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 12 6 armed and HIGH when any enabled partition is disarmed The remaining triggers are normally LOW and go HIGH when the corresponding condition occurs in at least one enabled partition The fire and burglary audible panic alarm triggers remain HIGH until a User Code OFF is entered in all enabled partitions that display these conditions The silent panic duress trigger works the same way except that it is momentary when initiated by duress The fire supervisory and trouble triggers remain HIGH until the underlying faults are corrected and the User Code OFF is entered in all enabled partition s that display these conditions When a Long Range Radio is installed configure the sense select for zones 1 and 2 in the Long Range Radio to activate on 5V positive trigger This is necessary to prevent false alarms from occurring Refer to the installation instructi
155. enrolled devices connected 3 Ifyou intend to manually enter the serial numbers through the keypad or through Compass downloading software all the devices may be connected before powering up to program 4 Notethe polling loop devices that have DIP switches on them Set each device s DIP Switches for the zone number to which it is being assigned When setting addresses refer to the device s instructions Certain polling loop devices such as the 4193SN and 4191SN do not have DIP switches Instead they have embedded serial numbers that must be enrolled by the control during Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide Section 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Certain polling loop devices have a DIP switch that can be used either to select the device s zone number or to select the enrolling of a unique embedded serial number by the control panel When used with VISTA 32FB these devices must be set for the serial number mode of operation BASIC POLLING LOOP CONNECTIONS VISTA 32FB BUILT IN POLLING LOOP 2 WIRE RUNS SHOWN IN A STAR CONFIGURATION Figure 7 1 Polling Loop Connections The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide additional polling loop current to extend the polling loop wire run length and or to provide individual electrically isolated polling loops Refer to Figures 7 2a and 7 2b DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender module with the VISTA 32FB Be sure to includ
156. eport codes for the event log System Group 4 codes 5 Exit Program Mode by pressing 99 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 20 The Mechanics of Programming Event Logging Procedures In order for proper time and date stamping to occur the system s real time clock must be set Refer to Section 28 Setting the Real Time Clock If the printer is selected to be on line field 1 72 events will print automatically as they occur To display or print on demand the following commands apply Commands Display Mode Installer or Master Code 60 Print Mode Installer or Master Code 61 Clear Event Log Installer or Master Code 62 To EXIT Event Log Press at any time Display Printing After entering either the Display or Print Mode the following will be displayed ENTER 0 RECENT The event log holds up to 224 events and can display or print all events In a category complete or only those events in a category occurring since the last Clear Event Log command recent Note that once the event log is full the oldest event will be erased upon the logging of any new event Press the desired Display Mode key O or 1 17 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 17 4 SCAN LOG BY PART The system allows viewing of any partition s event log Enter 0 NO 1 2 PART the partition number for the partition whose events are to be displayed Enterin
157. er kissoff from the central station if sending Closing reports Otherwise enter 0 Must be 1 for UL installations 359 ENABLE BELL 2 and AUX RELAY CHIME ANNUNCIATION oof Enter 1 to enable the Chime function on Bell Output 2 and the aux relay Otherwise enter O 3x60 BELL 2 and AUX RELAY TIMEOUT foo o Jf Defines the length of time Bell Output 2 and the aux relay will sound for all audible alarms multiply entry O1 15 by 2 minutes for actual duration Minimum 16 minutes for UL burglary installations 23 19 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 361 AUX RELAY FUNCTION SELECTION 1 Select the condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay Options are 0 Trouble Supervisory 1 Alarm silenced by Code OFF 2 Smoke detector reset 3 Battery save 4 Alarm silenced by Code 67 3x82 BURG FEATURES ON PARTITION 1 ENABLE 1 Enter 1 to enable burglary features on Partition 1 Enter Oto disable Arm AWAY STAY INSTANT MAXIMUM Test and Chime functions burglary features are automatically enabled on other partitions 385 SYSTEM ZONE BYPASS INHIBIT 1 Enter Oto prevent bypass of fire and system supervisory zones Enter 1 to allow only the Installer Code to bypass Enter 2 to allow Installer or Master Code to bypass Note Applies only to fire zone types 9 16 17 and 18 and system zones 970 977 Applies to Partition 1 only 23 20 SECTION 24 Scheduling Options In T
158. er switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired to zone 6 e Assign zone 6 toa burglary partition Program it for day trouble night alarm zone type 5 when only one burglary partition is used Program it for 24 hr audible alarm zone type 7 when more than one burglary partition is used Enable the Zone 6 Alternate Tamper function program field 3 17 e All wiring between the bell and panel must be run in conduit Remaining wires do not need to be run in conduit e All wiring not run in conduit must exit from the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the cabinet e All unused knockouts must be plugged using the disc plugs and carriage bolts Supplied with the VISTA ULKT enclosure kit as indicated in the diagram below e Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox using the 18 one inch long Phillips head screws Supplied with the VISTA ULKT enclosure kit after all wiring programming and checkout procedures have been completed CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS Shows typical local Grade A listing installation RUN BELL WIRES IN CONDUIT PLUG THIS KNOCK OUT CLIP ON DOOR TAMPER SWITCH CABINET MOUNTING HOLE 4 PLACES PLUG THIS PLUG THIS KNOCK OUT KNOCK OUT TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN DISC PLUGS DIMPLES IN DISC PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE KNOCK OUT OPENING a lt KNOCK OUT OPENING PLUG THIS RUN ALL
159. er up to 32 keystrokes A Speed Key sequence can include different commands Press the D key to separate different commands For example the user may want to perform the following sequence Desired function Keystrokes GOTO Partition 2 Enter 2 Bypass Zones 10 and 11 Press bypass 6 then the zone numbers 010 and O11 Armin Maximum Mode Press maximum 4 key Return to Partition 1 Enter 1 To program that Speed K ey sequence type the following 2 D 6010011 D D 1 D D 29 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Note that the D key Is pressed after each command Press D twice to complete the entry and exit When defining Speed Key sequences do not use the key to represent Quick Arming The system uses the code entered in response to the prompt to initiate commands in a Speed Key sequence so the Quick Arm key is unnecessary The system interprets the use of the key in a Speed Key sequence as its designated function only e g 2 is not interpreted as Arm AWAY but rather as Enter House ID Sniffer Mode Executing Speed Key Sequence To execute a Speed Key sequence do the following If a lettered key A B C has been assigned as a Speed Key press the appropriate key If a user code is required for any part of the Speed K ey sequence the following prompt appears Otherwise the Speed K ey sequence automatically begins ENTER USER CODE KKK Enter the user code The programmed Speed Key sequence w
160. ervised telephone ine Optional Keyswitch Supports the ADE MCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system s 2 partitions If used zone 7 is no longer available as a protection zone Voltage Triggers Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state for different conditions Used with LRR Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as a remote keypad sounder keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs or a printer to print the system s event log Event Log Keeps a log of different event types enabled in programming The event log has the following characteristics e Stores up to 224 events e Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use of Compass software e Can be printed on a serial printer using a 4100SM Module including zone alpha descriptors e Printed events can be sent to an alphanumeric pager Scheduling Provides the following scheduling capabilities e Open close schedules for control of arming disarming and reporting e Holiday schedules allows different time windows for open close schedules e Timed events for activation of relays auto bypassing and unbypassing auto arming and disarming etc e Access schedules for limiting system access to users by time e End User Output Programming Mode provides 20 timers for relay control Communications Formats Supports the following formats for the primary and secondary central station receivers e ADEMCO Low Speed Standard or Expanded e Sescoa Radionics e ADE
161. es If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been disconnected from the phone lines the control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair If upon disconnection of the control panel there is still a problem on the line notify the telephone company that they have a problem and request prompt repair service The user may not under any circumstances in or out of warranty attempt any service or repairs to the system It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service agency for all repairs FCC PART 68 NOTICE This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company This equipment uses the following jacks An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area If this equipment causes harm to the t
162. eseseeeeeeeeeeees 23 10 SYSTEM COMMANAS cceesseceeeeeeesesseeeeeeesssaaaeeeeeeeesens B 1 System COMMUNICATION 0 ccccccesesesseeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeeees 25 1 System Defaults sedrer aE EEEa 20 1 SY STEM LOBATA a 30 5 SYSE LOB Abaria a eee ieee 30 1 System Messages esssssssssrsrrsrnrsrersnnrrersrnrrrrnrerenne 30 5 System Sensor A77 716B EOL Relay Module 6 3 SYSTEM ZONE BYPASS INHIBIT 23 20 SV SECM ZONES a araa A EE AA aA NEE 1 2 Telephone Line Connections sssssserrersessrrrrrrrerren 16 1 Telephone Line Supervision s ssssssssrrrrsessrrrrrrreesene 16 1 TEMPORAL SIREN PYESE ende 23 1 Temporary Schedule ssssssssssssssrnrrrressrrnrrrrressrnrrenee 24 5 Temporary Schedule Worksheet cccceceeeeeeeeeees 24 17 Temporary Schedules sssssssssessssrrnrrrreessrrrrrereesrnnn 24 17 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Temporary Schedules Programming 24 17 TEST REPORTINTERVALC iccse 23 3 Testing The System sssssssssrsrrrrssssrrrrrrressrrnrrrressne 30 1 Theory of Partitioning sssssssssssssssrrrrrrressrrrrrrreesrnnn 2 1 Time and Date arien 27 1 Time Driven Events sssssesssrrrressrrrresrrreresrrrrresnne 24 3 Time Driven Events Worksheet c cccccessseeeees 24 11 Time Window DefinitionS sessssssesrrrreesrrrreserrrren 24 3 TiIMEWINGOWS airn ia TN 24 7 Time Windows Definitions Worksheet 000008 24 8 Time Windows ProgramMmMing s
163. eter Armed Interior Armed AWAY Yes Ye No Yves ive 29 2 Section 29 Keypad Functions Global Arming If enabled for the user the keypad will display the following ARMALL If NO the keypad prompts for arming each partition individually If YES the system attempts to arm all partitions allowed by this user If there are any faults open doors windows etc the keypad will display them See notes below These faults must be corrected or the zone bypassed before arming will occur When faults are corrected repeat the arming procedure Notes e When using the Global Arm feature if there are faults in any of the selected partitions the system will enter a Summary Mode in which the faulted zones of all of the selected partitions will be displayed These faults must be corrected or bypassed Code BYPASS will attempt to bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions This Summary Mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed e If when disarming the system using a Global Disarm any of the selected partitions has a condition that would cause the keypad to beep such as alarm memory or a trouble condition the system enters a Summary Mode Whilein this mode the alarm memory or trouble conditions of all of the selected partitions will be displayed Summary mode will continue until either approximately 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm occurs that clears the beeping Access Cont
164. etter x under them As the week progresses the selected days are reset to the inactive state but all other entries for the temporary schedule will remain programmed Press to store the entries or press to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry Mode without making any changes Section 24 Scheduling Options User Scheduling Menu Mode The system provides up to 20 timers that will be available to the end user for the purpose of controlling output devices 4204 relay These timers are comparable to the individual appliance timers that might be purchased at a department store The output devices themselves are programmed into the system by the installer during Raday Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide The end user needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor The installer may set certain relays to be restricted during Raday Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide These relays may not be controlled by the end user this prevents the end user from controlling doors pumps bell outputs etc To enter this mode the user enters Security Code 83 Output Timer Enter the output timer number to be programmed 01 20 01 20 00 Quit 01 Press to accept entry and move to the next prompt Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode 06 07 00P 11 45P If that timer number has already been programmed a PORCH LITE 04 summary screen will appear
165. evels below 4 4 cannot support Contact ID reporting If you need to update your 685 receiver contact your distributor The following describes each format in greater detail 3 1 and 4 1 Standard Comprised of a 3 or 4 digit subscriber number and a single Formats digit report code e g Alarm Trouble Restore Open Close etc 3 1 and 4 1 Expanded Comprised of a 3 or 4 digit subscriber number and a two Formats digit report code The first digit is displayed on the first line followed by a second line where the first digit is repeated 3 or 4 times and followed by the second digit This is the expanded digit Comprised of a 4 digit subscriber number and 2 digit report code ADEMCO Contact ID Comprised of a 4 digit subscriber number 1 digit event Reporting Format qualifier new or restore 3 digit event code 2 digit partition number and 3 digit zone number user number or system status number ADEMCO High Speed Comprised of 13 digits as follows a 4 digit account number eight channels of zone information 1 8 or duress plus 9 15 one status channel which identifies the type of events being reported in the eight zone locations Report 3 1 4 1 34 1 4 1 4 2 Standard Expanded Low Spd or E xpress Alarm SSS S A SSS S A SSSS AZ AAA A Z Trouble SSS S T SSS S T SSSS Tt TTT T t Bypass SSS S B SSS S B SSSS Bb BBB B b AC Loss SSS S E SSS S E SSSS EAc EEE E Ac LowBatt S SSS S L SSS S L
166. f each had its own control These areas are called partitions Partitions are used to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions and can be given a different authority level in each Before anything can be assigned to those partitions the number of required partitions 1 2 must first be determined Following are some facts the user should know about partitioning Keypads Each keypad must be given a unique address and be assigned to one partition Please note that it can also be assigned to Partition 3 if Master keypad operation is desired See Master Keypad Setup and Operation later in this section Zones Each zone must be assigned to one partition The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition s keypad s Fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1 Users Each user may be given access to one or more partitions If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like to arm disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command the user must be enabled for global arming for those partitions when entering user codes A user with access to more than one partition multiple access can log on to one partition from another partition s keypad provided that program field 2x18 Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition to be logged on to from another A part
167. ffects the lobby is disarmed the lobby cannot be armed and the message UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION will be displayed You cannot select a partition to arm the lobby unless it has first been selected to affect the lobby Enable field 1 18 before enabling field 1 19 The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate if different options are set for another partition in fields 1 18 and 1 19 1 18 1 19 Disarms when Attempts to Can be armed Affects Lobb A Lobb partition arm when if other a y disarms partition partitions arms disarmed ENTRY NOT ALLOWED Example Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2 COMMON LOBBY MAIN ENTRANCE User 1 has access to Office 1 and the common lobby User 2 has access to Office 2 and the common lobby Office 1 is set up to affect the common lobby but not arm it Office 2 is set up to affect and arm the common lobby VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide In the tables below the notations in parentheses indicate the current status of the other partition when the user takes action Sequence 1 Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action User 1 Disarms Armed Disarms User 2 Disarmed Disarms No Change User 1 Arms Disarmed No change User 2 Armed Arms Arms Sequence 2 Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action User 2 Armed Disarms Disarms User 1 Disarms Disarmed No change User 2
168. for keyswitch operation If the keyswitch is used the fire and panic alarm voltage triggers automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for support of the Keyswitch LEDs Reports openings closing by User 0 if reporting is enabled in field 40 BELL 1 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING part specific of Enter 1 to enable 1 2 second external alarm sounding ding at the end of exit delay or after kissoff from the central station if sending Closing reports Otherwise enter 0 Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations Bell test on arming is required in UL commercial burglary installations AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING of Enter 1 to enable sounding at the keypad rapid beeping when AC power is lost Sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss Enter 0 if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT 2 Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the central station during a community blackout Enter 1to randomize AC loss reporting between 10 and 40 min after an actual AC loss Enter 2 for 6 12 hours after AC loss Enter O for normal AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss VIP MODULE PHONE CODE oo 11 Jf If a 4285 4286 Voice Module is being used enter the 2 digit phone code used to access the system Enter 01 09 for first digit and enter 11 for or 12 for for second digit To disable the voice module enter 00 for the first di
169. g O NO will display all events that occurred in the system regardless of partition Events are displayed in chronological order from most recent to oldest For display and printing purposes events are stored on a partition by partition basis except system events and are grouped into five categories as follows Use the 3 and 1 keys to scroll to the next and previous screens respectively ALARM EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have either caused an alarm TYPE CCC UUU or have been restored in selected partition CHECK EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have caused a trouble or TYPE CCC UUU supervisory condition in selected partition BYPASS EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have been bypassed In TYPE CCC UUU selected partition OP CL EVENT LOG Displays time date and user number for each arming and TYPE CCC UUU disarming of the system for the partition selected SYSTEM EVENT LOG Displays time date for system conditions such as AC loss TYPE CCC UUU communication failure etc regardless of partition ALL EVENT LOG Displays all categories of events in chronological order from TYPE CCC UUU most recent to oldest TEST EVENT LOG Displays all test events TYPE CCC UUU To display the events in a particular category press 8 at the desired category screen If the system is in Display Mode the most recent event is displayed Press 1 to display older events press 3 to display more recent events
170. g a 4297 Polling Loop Extender Module Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this section Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones Polling loop zones have the following characteristics e Must use RPM Remote Point Module devices e Supervised by control panel e Can be individually assigned to either of two partitions e Can be individually assigned to bell outputs and or auxiliary relay e Polling loop smoke detector LED will latch on the first detector to go into alarm Clearing alarm memory clears the latched LED e Polling loop smoke detector LED periodically flashes to indicate communication with the control VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Wiring Addressing RPM Devices All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel to the and polling loop terminals of the control panel 28 and 29 You can wire from device to device or have multiple branches connected directly to the control panel in a star configuration as shown in Figure 7 1 Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel each device has its own unique zone number or group of zones if it is a zone expansion device On some devices this is determined by the setting of DIP switches Other devices have a built in unique Serial number that must be enrolled into the control as the zone number desired Set up the polling loop as follows 1 Run wires to each device on the polling loop No individual wi
171. ger interface s cover before wiring e When the 4100APG is mounted inside the control cabinet attach it to the cabinet s Interior surface with 2 faced adhesive tape The cover may be left off of the interface if it is mounted within the cabinet Do not mount the 4100APG on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board 18 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide e When the 4100APG is to be mounted outside the cabinet use the screw holes at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically 2 faced adhesive tape may be used if preferred The wires can be brought out from the side or back of the cabinet a round breakout is also available on the back Wiring the 4100APG Without the Event Log Printer The 4100APG connects to the VISTA 32FB via the 4100SM The 4100SM is wired tothe J 2 connector on the control via the 4142TR Cable See Figure 18 1 Connecting the 4100SM to the control Connect the 4142TR toJ 2 on the control Connect the RED wire of 4142TR to TB1 6 of 4100SM RxD Connect the VIOLET wire of 4142TR to TB1 1 of 4100SM DTR Connect the TB1 7 of 4100SM toterminal 12 Auxiliary Power of the control Connect the TB 1 8 of 4100SM to terminal 11 Auxiliary Power of the control oe Ie SS Connecting the 4100APG to the 4100SM 1 Connect the incoming telephone line to the 4L00APG RJ 11 connector labeled LINE 2 Connect the optional handset side of telephone line to 4100APG RJ 11 connector labe
172. git and enter 11 for the second digit of the code disable code 00 11 Must be disabled for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES partition specific foo 995 996 999 Enter 1 to enable the appropriate keypad panics used in this partition Otherwise enter 0 23 24 25 26 27 28 Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions MULTIPLE ALARMS partition specific Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a given zone during an armed period Note that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration This selection applies to local sounding and has no impact on the number of communication messages transmitted Refer to 84 Swinger Suppression for limiting communication messages Enter Lif this feature is desired Enter Oif not desired Must be 1 for UL installations IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER of Enter 1 to disable ignore tamper Enter O if tamper detection is desired Must be O for UL installations Note Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or 5800 Series transmitters This option is used to disable tamper detection on these devices BURG TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8 1 Enter 1 to allow optional triggering of the voltage output on Pin 3 of the J 2 header to include zone response type 8 24 hr auxiliary Enter Oif only burglary and audible panic alarms
173. gned to either of two partitions e Upto 16 2 wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 32 total e 4 wiresmoke or heat detectors on zones 1 8 power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be Supervised with an EOL device e Upto 50 2 wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8 e Can be individually assigned to bell outputs and or aux relay Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1 8 1 Connect sensors contacts to the hardwire zone terminals 15 through 27 2 Connect N C devices in series with the high side of the loop The 2K EOL resistor must be connected in series with the devices following the last device 3 Connect N O devices tn parallel across the loop The 2K EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last device 6 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1 2 and 8 and 300 ohms for all other zones excluding the 2K EOL resistor Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2 6 2 Zones 1 and 2 have the added capability of supporting 2 wire smoke detectors Each zone provides enough standby current 2mA to power up to sixteen of the smoke detectors listed below Each zone provides only enough alarm current 20mA to power one smoke detector in the alarmed state When assigned zone type 9 or 16 the second entry of a User Code OFF sequence at a keypad will interrupt power to these zones to allow detectors to be reset foll
174. h a non global code the lobby partition operation will be automatic as described by fields 1 18 and 119 Other Methods of Arming Disarming Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and or arms the common lobby in one of the following manners e Quick Arm e Keyswitch Section 2 Planning a Partitioned System e Wireless Button e Wireless Keypad Arming Disarming Renotd y If arming or disarming remotely through Compass downloading software the lobby will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby The lobby must be armed separately after arming all affecting partitions first Auto Arming Disarming If scheduling is used to automatically arm and or disarm partitions the common lobby partition will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby The lobby must be included as a partition to be armed disarmed and must be scheduled as the last partition armed If using auto arming make sure that the Auto Arm Delay and Auto Arm Warning periods fields 2 05 and 2 06 combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby This will cause the lobby to arm last Master Keypad Setup and Operation Although this system has two actual partitions it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning keypads as master keypads for the system Any keypad assigned to Partition
175. h defines what the action will affect relay relay group partition zone list user group The action specifier varies depending on the type of action selected The following is a list of the Action Codes desired actions used when programming time driven events Note that these codes are independent of the relay codes programmed during Relay Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide Relay commands Action Code Action Specifier O1 Relay On Relay 02 Relay Off Relay 03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay 04 Relay Close XX minutes set in field 1 74 Relay 05 Relay Close YY seconds set in field 1 75 Relay 06 Relay Group On Relay Group 07 Relay Group Off Relay Group 08 Relay Group Close for 2 seconds Relay Group 09 Relay Group Close XX minutes set in field 1 74 Relay Group 10 Relay Group Close YY seconds set in field 1x75 Relay Group 24 11 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 24 12 Arm Disarm Commands Activation times 1 Beginning 2 End 3 During are the only valid choices for automatic arming and disarming functions During can be used to arm or disarm the control for a specific time only For example if During is selected with Arm STAY the system will automatically Arm STAY at the beginning of the window and automatically disarm at the end of the window Action Code Action Specifier 20 Arm STAY Partition s 21 Arm AWAY Partition s 22 Disarm Partition s
176. he problem and then enter User Code OFF to turn off Section 12 J 2 Trigger Outputs e OFF if normal If used program field 3 20 must be set to 2 and the 5140LED Module must be connected to J 2 OUT 1 3 4 5 as shown in the diagram below It is designed to be mounted into a standard single gang electrical box and installed as follows di Pull wires from the panel s J 2 connector through an opening in the single gang box and splice these wires to the module s flying leads Solderless splices may be used Mount the module s PC board onto one side of the PC board retainer bracket Supplied Slide the PC board retainer bracket into the box and fasten with screws Supplied Mount the stainless steel decorative cover Supplied onto the box J2 CONNECTOR 5140LED MODULE AC POWER BROWN O AC POWER DIALER 2 FAULT GREEN ee conn eatine COMM FAILURE ORANGE O DIALER 1 FAULT O DIALER 2 FAULT O FUTURE USE TO AUX PWR 1 OUTPUT TO TERM 5140LED MODULE WIRES COLORS Figure 12 4 5140LED Indicator Module Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment The jJ 2 connector can be used to provide triggers for the following conditions Firealarm Burglary audible panic alarm Silent panic duress alarm Fire supervisory Trouble Opening closing arming disarming These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as ADEMCO s 7720 7720ULF and 7920SE Long Range Radios 7820 Transmitter wh
177. her to hold the phone connection for 1 minute Once triggering occurs the control will give up the phone line to the AAV Module without breaking connection with the central station During the time the AAV is active all sirens and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will be shut off When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm verification session is completed all keypad sounds will be restored Sirens will be restored if the alarm timeout period has not expired As part of its fail safe software the control will limit all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes This is because once the session begins the AAV Module controls the duration If a new fire alarm should occur during a session the control will break the phone connection 11 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide and send the new Fire Alarm report then re trigger the AAV Mode All other dialer messages triggered during ongoing conversation will be held until either the AAV Module signals that it is inactive or the 15 minute timeout occurs The AAV Module is triggered via the use of a 4204 Relay as shown in Figure 11 1 The start and stop conditions for that relay must be set to choice 60 Audio Alarm Verification during Raay Programming in the 93 Menu ModeProgramming section of the Quick Start Guide Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm installation If this option is selected it may defeat modem download
178. his Section Introduction to Scheduling Time Window Definitions Open Close Definitions Scheduling Menu Mode Scheduling Menu Structure Time Windows Daily Open Close Schedules Holiday Schedules TimeDriven Events Limitation of Access Schedules Temporary Schedules User Schedule Menu Mode Introduction to Scheduling This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel UL General Bypass and Auto Arm Fail reports must be programmed for UL installations Auto disarming is not for use in UL installations The scheduling features allow certain operations to be automated such as auto arming auto disarming auto bypassing and unbypassing of zones and activating relay outputs using 4204 modules The system uses time windows a programmed period of time with a start and stop time for defining open close schedules holiday schedules user defined temporary schedules and access schedules for users Scheduled events are programmed by user friendly menu modes of programming 80 81 and 83 modes explained in detail in this section These menus proceed step by step through the options Auto Arming The system can automatically arm AWAY Mode a partition at the end of a pre determined closing arming time window 24 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp Up Guide 24 2 e Autoarming can be delayed three ways by use of the auto arm delay the auto arm wa
179. hone lines keypads RF receivers and relays In addition the control offers scheduling capabilities and allows certain operations to be automated by pressing a single button The system has the capability to interface with an alpha numeric paging device and also an ECP long range radio unit that can send Contact D messages As shipped the VISTA 32FB is suitable for use in listed commercial fire and non listed U L commercial burglary installations When used with the optional VISTA ULKT attack resistant enclosure kit and the optional 1451 18VAC 72VA wired in transformer the VISTA 32FB may also be used in listed commercial burglary installation Features Basic Hardwired Zones Provides 8 style B hardwire zones with the following characteristics e EOLR supervision optional for zones 3 8 supporting N O or N C sensors EOLR supervision required for fire and UL burglary installations e Individually assignable to either of 2 partitions e Upto 16 2 wire smoke detectors each on zone 1 e 4 wiresmoke or heat detectors on zones 1 8 power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be Supervised with an EOL device e Upto 50 2 wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8 Optional Expansion Zones Polling Loop Expansion Supports up to 24 additional hardwire zones using a built in polling multiplex loop interface Polling loop zones have the following characteristics e Must use RPM Remote Point Module devices e Supervised by control panel
180. hown in the figure below to ensure that neither battery terminals can be shorted Battery Fast on tabs Transformer Enclosure Aaye Ag 12v battery Note When connecting batteries in parallel e Use batteries from the same manufacturer and with the same voltage and capacity rating 19 6 Section 19 Final Power Up Procedure e Use batteries with approximately the same age and state of charge e Usecables provided and observe polarity It is recommended that all batteries be replaced at the same time even if only one battery has become weak 4 Attach the Red and Black wires on the battery connector as follows a Red to positive battery tab on the control board b Black to the negative battery tab on the control board See the Summary Of Connections diagram for location of the and battery tabs on the control board 5 Attach the Red and Black wires at the other end of the battery connector cable as follows a Red to positive terminal on the battery b Black to the negative terminal on the battery Battery Supervision The VISTA 32FB runs a brief battery test once a minute to determine if battery leads are connected and runs an extended battery test every 24 hours to determine if battery capacity is low less than approximately 11 5VDC If alow battery condition exists it will be displayed at the control s keypad s The indication will stop when the low battery condition has been re
181. ian eas mela eer aan ae 18 4 Section 19 Final _ Power U p Procedu Civsisssiisissscsivtasaiasacatecesiacacedansinaceradenadneaadanadnesnasaidecanasadsnedsaaacasiasneeian 19 1 Connecting he AG Transforme siswssnnauniceaiot iain nae Ieee ER eee 19 1 Earth Ground Connection S wicnivaiiase denies tad a aus 19 2 Backup Battery Calculation S aa A E ual ahuveiph A T 19 2 Total Control Panel Load Worksheets ccccsccccccssssececcesesseceeceeeseeeeceaeeeeeeseeageceeeesaseceeeessaaaeeeessueeeessseagges 19 3 Making the Battery COnMECEONS ssec a ayia vie a teats ee sere anne 19 6 Battery SU DEE VISION maae E RS 19 7 Section 20 The Mechanics of Programming s ssss snsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 20 1 Using Data Field Program M Od csscccccccssseceecceesseceecceeseeeeceeaseceeseeageceesseaaseeeessaaaeeeeessseaasessasseeestsaagees 20 1 System aNd Comm Mmcation Defaults cc ceecceccessseeeeceesseeeeceeeuceeeceesseceeseesaeeeesseageeseeseaaecesssaseeeseesssaageeeess 20 1 Entering Data Field Programming M Od e cccccccssssececceesesseceeceeessceeeceauseceeeseauseceeessauseceesssaaseceessseesssaagaes 20 2 Moving from One Page of Programming tO ANOtne l cccccccccccssseeececeeeseeeeeceaueceeeseaueeeeessaaeeeesssaeaeeeesaaes 20 2 VIEWING Data Fl SIGS sissies erscntecirtasivcticean tanechneseaaihad reas totum in ecniacevdeb aap uadelne dade nlavee wa eiamaruatranana
182. ic information Addressing the Keypads Preliminary Checkout Procedure To check that the system is working before connecting field wiring from zones and devices do the following 1 Temporarily connect a 2000 ohm end of line resistor across each of the basic hardwire zones 1 8 as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram Without actual zone wiring or EOL resistors connected the keypads will not display the READY message 2 Power up the system temporarily 3 Set each keypad to an Individual address 00 30 according to the keypad s instructions Set an alpha keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher addresses 00 and 01 are enabled in the system s default program Any keypads set for address 02 and above will appear blank until they are enabled in the system s program Each keypad must be set for a different address Keypads set to the Nonaddressable Mode address 31 will interfere with other keypads as well as other devices connected to the keypad terminals 4 Address and enable the keypads by performing the programming steps provided in Device Programming in the 93 Menu Mode portion of the Quick Start Guide The keypads will not operate until they are physically addressed and enabled 5 After addresses are set the green READY LED should light and the words DISARMED READY TO ARM should be displayed on keypads set to addresses 00 and 01 5 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 5 4 If
183. identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of coverage or redundant protection e Any zone from 1 to 32 can be used as a 5800 Series wireless zone RF System Installation Advisories e Place the receiver in a high centrally located area for best reception Do not place it on or near metal objects This will decrease the range and or block transmissions e For maximum range install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the control panel or any keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors in these units e f dual receivers are used e Both must be at least 10 feet from each other as well as from the control panel and remote keypads e Each receiver must be set to a different device address The receiver set to the lower address is considered the first RF receiver for Supervisory purposes e TheHouse Ds must be the same e Using two receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the system can support 32 zones using the 5881H plus a wireless keypad Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers 1 Mount the receiver Receivers must be mounted externally to the control and can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet Take this into consideration when determining mounting location 2 Connect the receiver s wire harness to the Keypad 1 terminals 11 12 13 14 Plug the connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver 3 Refer tothe Installation Ins
184. ill begin automatically To activate a Speed Key not assigned to the A B C keys press and hold down the D key for 2 seconds until the following prompt appears ENTER SPEED KEY 01 32 00 QUIT Enter the desired Speed Key number If a user code is required for any part of the Speed Key sequence the following prompt appears Otherwise the Speed K ey sequence automatically begins ENTER USER CODE KOK OK OK Enter the user code The programmed Speed Key sequence will begin automatically The system will apply the user code s Global Arming capabilities if the macro executes any arming or disarming commands Manual Relay Activation Mode 70 Mode 29 6 The system allows users to manually activate relays by keypad command using either the keypad or a telephone keypad if VIP Module is used The user will be prompted either by keypad alpha display or telephone voice module To activate relays from a keypad enter 4 digit Security Code 70 To activate relays using a telephone and VIP Module first dial the 2 digit phone access code When the system acknowledges the access enter 4 digit Security Code 70 The following prompts voice responses will begin ENTER DEVICE NO Voice ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW 00 QUIT 01 Enter the 2 digit number of the relay to be activated nn DEVICE IS OFF HIT O OFF 1 ON Section 29 Keypad Functions Voice VOICE DESCRIPTOR DEVICE NN ON OFF FOR VOICE DESCRIPTOR
185. ill toggle the AM PM indication Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry Press to store the entries and move to the arming closing window for Monday Pressing will scroll you through the prompts without making any changes This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm closing window for Monday The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window Enter the desired hour Press x to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner Press to move tothe AM PM position Pressing any key in the 0 9 range will toggle the AM PM indication Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry After the windows for that day have been completed the system will prompt for disarm and arm time windows for the next day Press if no changes are desired Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week When all the windows for all the days have been completed the system will prompt which days of the schedule are to be activated This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule To select the days that are to be activated enter 1 7 Monday 1 An x will appear under that day indicating the temporary schedule for that day is active Entering a day s number again will deactivate that day Pressing O will toggle all days on off The temporary schedule will only bein effect for the days that have the l
186. indications LEDNane Steady Blinking om puse Power ox onsaeyem NoPower vanuse me can CallinProgress PageRavy e J Busy TelephoneBusy NoDialTme x Page ra o ae baa ooo O f oom f Mg Dat koaa O f nooae Prog Data we oe o ao 18 4 SECTION 19 Final Power Up Procedure In This Section Connecting the AC Transformer Making Earth Ground Connections Backup Battery Calculations Total Control Pand Load Worksheets Making Battery Connections Battery Supervision Connecting the AC Transformer The VISTA 32FB has a built in enclosed AC power transformer with manually resettable circuit breaker protection located in the lower left hand corner of the control s cabinet U L e A dedicated 120VAC circuit must be used for fire applications e Wires must be rated for 90 degrees C or higher operation The following steps describe how to make AC power connections 1 Remove the cover from the transformer s enclosure 2 Remove the lower knockout on the left hand side of the cabinet Run 120VAC power wires into the transformer enclosure via this knockout Make sure that the dedicated AC circuit is not powered at this time Apply AC power only after all other wiring except the backup battery wiring has been completed 3 Use wire nuts not supplied to splice the 120VAC wires to the transformer s black and white flying leads Push the mated wires back into the transf
187. ine that the power supply and or backup battery are supplying proper voltages e Verify your programming information where applicable e Besureall keypads and devices are addressed properly e Note the proper model number of this product and the version level if Known along with any documentation that came with the product e Note your ADEMCO customer number and or company name Having this information handy will make it easier for us to serve you quickly and effectively The user may contact Technical Support via Toll Free Fax Please include a return fax number A reply should be received within 24 hours The user may also contact Technical Support via modem to ATLIS BBS Tech Support s Electronic Bulletin Board System Replies are posted within 24 hours East Coast Technical Support 1 800 645 7492 8 a m 6 p m E S T West Coast Technical Support 1 800 458 9469 8 a m 5 p m P S T Technical Support Fax Number 1 800 447 5086 ATLIS BBS Electronic Bulletin Board System 1 516 496 3980 1200 28 8 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Start Stop Bit No Parity ATLIS FAX Automated Document Retrieval Systen 1 800 573 0153 or 1 516 921 6704 ext 1667 ADEMCO World Wide Web Page HTTP WWW ADEMCO COM Interne E Mail Address ADEMCO_ TECH SPRT ADEMCO 165 ADEMCO COM APPENDIX A Regulatory Agency Statements UL Installation Requirements As shipped the VISTA 32FB is suitable for use in listed commercial fire and non listed commercial burgla
188. ing alarm e g for lobby door access Note that these zone types are for use by 5800 Series devices only NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS Keypad panic zones share the same zone response type for all 2 partitions but panics may be individually enabled for each partition IMPORTANT FAULT ANNUNCIATION Polling loop and RF troubles zones 988 990 and 997 will report as trouble conditions only and as such should be assigned zone type 19 if annunciation is desired See Polling Loop Supervision in Section 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Zones 009 032 and RF Systen Operation and Supervision in Section 8 Wirdess Zone Expansion section for more information 21 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 21 4 SECTION 22 Zone Index Zone Type Defaults In This Section Zone Index Zone T ype Defaults Zone Index The VISTA 32FB has 32 protection zones as well as supervisory zones for relays ECP devices devices that communicate through the keypad terminals and system troubles These zones are designated as follows ZONE RANGE 001 032 601 616 800 830 900 990 and 997 991 999 Keypad Panics ZONE FUNCTION Protection 001 032 Protection zones As indicates o Relay Supervisory Zones ECP Device Supervisory Zones includes keypads wireless receivers VIP Module relay System Supervisory Zones ACTUAL ZONE AS 001 032 Protection zones As indicates o 6 2 digit Relay Nu
189. ing Menu Mode press O until the O C SCHEDULES prompt appears O C Schedules Enter 1to program opening and closing schedules 1Yes O No 0 Partition Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following 01 02 00 Quit 01 open close schedules will apply Enter 00 at the PARTITION prompt to quit open close schedules programming and display the QUIT prompt Mon P1 OP WIND Enter the time window number 01 20 for the displayed day s 00 00 00 00 00 opening schedule beginning with Monday Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for that window number will be displayed as a programming aid Press to accept the entry Mon P1 CL WIND Enter the time window number for the displayed day s closing 00 00 00 00 00 schedule As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window number will be displayed Press the key to accept the entry Tue P1 OP WIND The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday s open close schedule 00 00 00 00 00 etc Follow the procedure for Monday s prompts When the last day of the week has been programmed the holiday opening and closing window prompts are displayed 24 9 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Hol P1 OP WIND Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time 00 00 00 00 00 windows Press the key to accept the entry When the entries are comp
190. ing chart gives an example of how the Open Close by Exception reporting works Example of Open Close Exception Reporting and Scheduling 6 01PM 5 59AM 6AM 9AM 9 01AM 3 59PM 4PM 6PM 6 01PM 5 59AM Early Opening reports will Opening Window Auto disarm delay begins Closing Window Auto arm delay begins Be aad Sy SHES i Auto disarm occurs after delay Auto arm warning begins manually disarmed before No reports sent if if auto disarm is enabled No reports sent if opening window begins system disarmed system is armed Early and Late Opening during this time sent if manual disarming has not aung Cue une and Closing reports are WIGO occurred at expiration of ndow programmable options in If an arming occurs a opening window or disarmed if user the Report Code _ Closing report is sent 4 Openi EE needs to re enter programming section E AA tation ate Opening reports will be E They are not dependent regardless of how the sent if disarm occurs after the Auto arm occurs after warning expires if auto arm is enabled Missed Opening reports will be Missed Closing reports will be sent if manual arming has not occurred at expiration of closing on the programming of Exception Reporting opening window expires window the Exception Reporting option is set Early Closing reports will be sent Late Closing reports will be option if manual arming occurs before sent if system is manually the closing window begins armed
191. is manual Connect the earth ground screw on the 5140DLM tothe earth ground screw terminal 30 on the main PCB using 16 AWG wire Cut the blue jumper when the dialer outputs are connected to telephone lines that havea telephone company MTU installed For Listed fire central station UL864 NFPA 72 applications use either a LORRA alone the main dialer with the LORRA or use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer For Listed fire U L remote station UL864 NFPA72 applications use the main dialer with the 5140DLM backup dialer Telephone line supervision is required for UL commercial fire alarm systems when a dual line dialer is used for fire signal transmission Telephone Line Supervision The supervision circuits on both dialer outputs will indicate a fault when the tip ring voltage falls below approximately 25 volts 13 volts for the main dialer when the main PCB blue jumper ts cut and 13 volts for the backup dialer when its blue jumper is cut A fault will also be indicated when the handset current is less than approximately 10mA Faults on the phone lines are displayed as zones 974 main dialer and 975 backup dialer 16 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp Up Guide DO NOT connect both outputs to the same telephone company line e To prevent the risk of shock disconnect phone lines at the telco jack before servicing the panel e If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX be sure the P
192. is not being used by another device keypads RF receivers etc The relay module will not operate until the device address you have chosen is enabled in the control s Device Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide 2 Mount the 4204 and 4204CF Modules as per the instructions provided with these modules Connect the 4204 4204CF Module s to the control s Keypad 1 terminals 11 14 when mounted remotely from the control they may be wired to Port 2 when mounted on or within the control s cabinet Use the flying lead cable or the screw terminals provided with each relay module to make connections 9 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 3 Homerun each remotely mounted module back to the control The table below shows the maximum wire run lengths from the control to each 4204 Refer to the instructions provided with the 4204CF for its maximum permissible wire lengths Maximum Length 125 fet 200 fet 300 feet 500 feet Programming Relays Before the relays in the system will operate each relay module must be enabled and each relay must be programmed as to how to act ACTION when to activate START and when to deactivate STOP To enable a relay module refer to Device Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide Refer to Reday Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide for procedures on setting the action activation and
193. isarm the system if the control powers up armed 23 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 4 29 QUICK ARM partition specific Enter 1 to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY STAY INSTANT or MAXIMUM modes by using the key instead of the user code When armed the system reports closing as User 0 if Open Close reporting for User 2 typically a Master level user was enabled for a given partition Enter O if Quick Arm is not desired The user code must always be used to disarm the system Note that if Quick Arm is used the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot disarm the system 30 MAIN DIALER TOUCHTONE OR ROTARY DIAL of Enter 1 if Touch tone service is being used Enter Oif rotary phone service is used If selecting TouchTone make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for Touch tone service Note that whether or not Touch tone dialing for call placement is permitted communication by the use of DTMF signaling ADEMCO High Speed will still take place See field 1 33 TouchTone W Rotary Backup 31 PABX ACCESS CODE oi 1 Lo Ll This field is used to enter up to four 2 digit numbers 00 09 B F 11 15 If not required enter nothing and proceed to next address otherwise enter prefix needed to obtain an outside telco line 32 PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT partition specitic i x33 x34 Enter 00 09 B F 11 15 15 15 Enter a 3 or 4 digi
194. ition can be selected as a common lobby partition and other partitions can affect this partition by causing arming disarming of this partition to be automated see Common Lobby Logic later in this section VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Setting Up a Partitioned System The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below If more information on how to program the prescribed options is required see Section 20 The Mechanics of Programming as well as each corresponding section s programming procedure 1 Determine how many partitions the system will require programmed in field 2x00 2 Assign keypads to partitions refer to the Quick Start Guide 3 Assign zones to partitions refer to the Quick Start Guide All fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1 to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly 4 Confirm that the zones assigned to those partitions are displayed at the keypad s 5 Assign users to partitions 6 Enable the GOTO feature program field 2 18 for each partition to which a multiple access user can log on alpha keypad only 7 Program partition specific fields see Section 23 Data Fiad Descriptions Common Lobby Logic When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building that shared partition may be assigned as the common lobby partition for the system program field 1 17 An example of this might bein a medical building where
195. itu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide APPENDIX B Summary of System Commands Event Logging Commands Wireless System Commands User Code Commands Arming Functions Event Log Display Code 60 Installer or Master Only Event Log Print Code 61 Installer or Master Only Clear Event Log Code 62 Installer or Master Only House ID Sniffer Mode Code 2 Installer Only Transmitter ID Test Code 3 Installer Only Go No Go Test Code 5 Test Key Add a User Code User Code 8 New User Number New User s Code Change a Code User Code 8 User Number New User s Code Delete a User s Code User Code 8 User Number to Be Deleted User Code View User Capability U ser Code Set Real Time Clock Installer Master Only Code 63 Arming Away Arming Stay Arming Instant Arming Maximum Quick Arm Global Arming Disarming Bypassing Zones Quick Bypass Chime Mode Partition GOTO GOTO Home Partition Panics View Downloaded Messages Display All Zone Descriptors Enter Code Away 2 Enter Code Stay 3 Enter Code I nstant 7 Enter Code Maximum 4 Use Key Instead of User Code F ollowed by Any of the Above Arming Mode Keys If Enabled for the User
196. keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone Tripping fire and panic zones will cause external sounders to sound and may trigger the dialer When each zone is restored the READY TO ARM message should appear again If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition s keypad s check both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment When the proper displays on the keypad s are received the hardwired zones in the system are functioning properly 3 Power down and continue to the next section SECTION 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Zones 009 032 In This Section Polling Loop Overview Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones Wiring Addressing RPM Devices Polling Loop Supervision Programming Polling Loop Zones Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones Compatible Polling Loop Devices Polling Loop Overview The system can be expanded from the basic 8 zones to up to 32 zones using the built in 2 wire polling loop Each device that is connected to the polling loop has the capability to communicate with the panel about its status These devices are called RPMs Remote Point Modules The polling loop provides both power and data to the RPM zones and is constantly monitoring the status of all zones enabled on the loop The maximum current draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more than 128mA unless usin
197. l cabinet Mount the unit using its accompanying mounting bracket 5800TM Wiring Connections Connect the 5800T M to the control panel s keypad connection terminals using the supplied connector with flying leads as follows WIRE TERMINAL ON CONTROL RED 12VDC Terminal 11 BLACK ground Terminal 12 GREEN data to control Terminal 13 YELLOW data from control Terminal 14 BLUE not used Cut the red jumper for address setting 28 cut the white jumper for address 29 cut both jumpers for address 30 This address must be enabled in the control s Device Programming as a keypad and then assigned to a partition see 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide For additional information refer to the 5800T M s instructions House ID Sniffer Mode This mode applies only if a wireless keypad 5827 5827BD is being used in a 5800 Series system Use the House ID Sniffer Mode to make sure a House ID that is in use in a nearby system is not selected To enter this mode proceed as follows 1 Enter Installer Code 2 2 The receiver will now sniff out any House Ds in the area and display them Keep the receiver in this mode for at least 2 hours to give a good indication of the House IDs being used Usea House lID that is not displayed 3 Toexit the Sniffer Mode simply enter the Installer Code OFF If the House ID of the receiver needs to be reprogrammed do so before proceeding Since
198. l partitions on or off or use keys 1 2 to toggle the letter x under the partition to which this holiday will apply Press the x key when all desired partitions have been assigned Section 24 Scheduling Options The HOLIDAY NUMBER prompt will be displayed again Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be programmed Quit Enter Oat the QUIT prompt to return to the main menu 1 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode Time Driven Events These are the schedules used to activate outputs bypass zones etc based on a time schedule There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the system with each event governed by the previously defined time windows The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are relay commands arm disarm commands zone bypassing commands and open close access conditions Time Driven Events Worksheet Fill out the worksheet using the steps outlined below Time Days Action Action Activation Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time ptt TE S e CE TE EE A E seoj SIST o S 1 First enter the schedule number 01 20 and time window number 01 20 and note the day of the week the action is desired 2 Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier The action codes are the events that are to take place when the scheduled time is reached Each action also requires an action specifier whic
199. lay number Press to accept entry The TIME WINDOW prompt appears Actions 06 10 If actions 06 10 were selected the prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the relay group number Press to accept entry The TIME WINDOW prompt appears Actions 20 24 and 40 41 If actions 20 24 or 40 41 were selected the prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the partition to which the action applies Enter Oto select all partitions Enter a partition number again to deselect it Press to accept entry The TIME WINDOW prompt appears Actions 30 31 If actions 30 31 were selected the prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the zone list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed Press to accept entry The TIME WINDOW prompt appears Action 42 If action 42 was selected the prompt at the right will be displayed Enter the group number to which the time window will apply Press to accept entry The TIME WINDOW prompt appears Action Specifier 01 RELAY 00 Action Specifier 01 RELAY GRP 00 Action Specifier PART 1 2 HIT 0 2 X X Action Specifier 01 ZONE LIST ENTER 1 8 1 Action Specifier GROUP 12345678 HIT 0 8 X Action Codes 50 Off normal Reminder 01 Time Window 00 00 00 00 01 01 Active time Days MTWTFSSH Hit 0 8 x x Quit 1 YES O0 NO 0 Section 24 Scheduling Options Action 50 Action Specifier
200. le COMMECUIONG ccccccsssseceeceeeseececceeesseeeeceeusecesesseuseeeeseseaaeceseseeeasesssaaaeeess 10 3 Figure 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module CONNECTIONS eesssssessrrenessrrreesrrrrrenrrrressrrrrnnsrrrrnsnrrrrenreee 11 3 Figure 12 1 J 2 Pin Assignments and FuUnctionS sesssseseessrrrresrrrrressrrrrresrrrrressrrrrrnsrnrrnnnrnrrrennnrrrerrrernrreee 12 2 Figure 12 2 Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring ccccsccccccessseceecceessseceeeceeuseeeesceausecesessagseeeesssagseeeesseassssaaseeeess 12 2 Figure 12 3 Remote Keyswitch WILIING ccscecccccseseeeeececeeseeeecccseaueceeesseaeeeeeesuaaeeeesseaseeeessseaeeeesaueeesessaaeeeeess 12 3 Figure 12 4 5140LED Indicator Module esssssssssrnrnressrrrrnesrrrrressrrrrrnsrrrrrnsrnrrrenrnrrrnsnnrrnnnnnrnrennnnnnnnnennnnnnnee 12 5 Figure 12 5a Connections to 7720 Long Range RAIO cccccssssececcesesseceeceeesseeeeseeneaseeeeeseesseeeeeseaseeesseeeess 12 6 Figure 12 5b Connections to 7720ULF Long Range Radio ss s sessrrreressrrrressrrrrresrnrrrrnsrrrrresrnrrressnrrrrenree 12 7 Figure 12 5c Connections to 7920SE LONG Range Radio sessssesessrrrreesrrrrrrrnsrrrrresrnrrrrnnrnrrresrnrrrenrnnrnnrreee 12 7 Figure 13 1 Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals ssssssnsessrrnrensrrrrresrrrrrrnnsrrrrresrnrrrenrnrrrenrnrrrensnrennrneee 13 2 Figure 14 1 External Sounder CONNECCIONS ccccccssseeececcesseeececeeeseeeeeeseusueeeeessaueeeee
201. led PHONE 3 Connect the DB25M to DB 9M Cable Supplied from 4100SM 25 pin to 4100APG 9 pin connector labeled SERIAL PORT INPUT 4100APG DB 9 J Serial Port Input To Telco Figure 18 1 Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer 18 2 Section 18 4100APG Pager Interface With the Event Log Printer The VISTA 32FB will support the 4100APG and serial printer See Figure 18 2 The serial printer must be configured for 1200 baud rate seven data bits even parity and one stop bit 7 E 1 TTT HEE J2 11 12 OJO Aux Pwr Aux Gnd Ee 4100SM DB 25 1200 Baud Serial DB 25 Printer 7 E 1 4100APG DB 9 J Serial Port Input RJ 11 To Telco Figure 18 2 Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer When the module s mounting and wiring is completed the module s cover should be attached with label affixed as indicated next Programming the Control for the Pager e n field 64 enter 1 to enable the 4100APG pager interface e In field 65 enter the phone number of the paging service for Alarm reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e n field 66 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Alarm reports This is the PIN number Up to 10 digits may be entered e n field 67 enter the phone number of the paging service for Trouble reports Up to 17 digits may be entered e n field 68 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Trouble reports This is the PIN
202. leted the PARTITION prompt is displayed again Repeat this procedure for each partition in the system Quit Enter 0 at the QUIT prompt to return to the main menu 1 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode Holiday Schedules 24 10 A holiday schedule will override the regular daily open close schedule on the programmed holidays throughout the year Holiday Schedule Worksheet The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system Each holiday can be assigned to any combination of partitions List the desired holidays in a Month Day format on the worksheet Check the partitions for which these holidays apply Month Day i _ ia a HH E DAE ES S D R O ne Holiday Schedule Programming After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press O until the HOLIDAYS prompt appears Holidays Enter 1 to program holiday schedules 1Yes OQ No 0 HOLIDAY NUMBER Enter the 2 digit holiday number 01 16 to be programmed 01 16 00 Quit 01 and press to accept entry Enter 00 at the HOLIDAY NUMBER prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the QUIT prompt 01 ENTER DATE The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months digit Enter 00 00 the appropriate month then press to proceed to the day field Enter the appropriate day for the holiday Press to accept the entry Part 12 Holidays can be set for any partition as follows Press Oto Hit0 2 x x turn al
203. levels referred to as pages The first page is accessed as soon as Programming Mode is entered The second third and fourth pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a 1 2 and 3 respectively in front of the 2 digit field address The words ALT PROGRAM MODE are displayed along with 100 200 or 300 depending upon which page of program fields is accessed to indicate the higher page of fields 1 Toaccess the next level of fields press 94 2 Then press XX where XX the last two digits of the program field and make the desired entry 3 Toreturn tothe previous page of fields press x99 press 94 to move to 2nd page press 99 to move back to 1st page second page of fields 101 177 press 94 to move to 3rd page press 99 to move back to 2nd page third page of fields 2 00 2 24 press 94 to move to 4th page press 99 to move back to 3rd page fourth page of fields 3 00 385 Viewing Data Fields To view the contents of a data field press the 2 digit field address The field s entries will be displayed but no changes can be made 20 2 Entry Errors Section 20 The Mechanics of Programming If an invalid address is entered the keypad will display FC If a program entry is improperly entered for example a number larger than permitted the entry position of the keypad display will go blank In either of the above cases simply re enter the correct field number
204. ll not The priority of events from most to least important transmitted from the VISTA 32F B to the LRR is Fire Alarms Panic Alarms Burglary Alarms Fire Troubles Non Fire Troubles Bypasses Openings Closings Test messages and all other types of reports This ranking priority is based on the assumption that multiple events occur at approximately the same time There isn t an event priority of messages transmitted via the radio to the central station Messages are transmitted on a First In F irst Out FIFO basis There are two subscriber IDs programmed into the LRR primary and secondary These correspond to the two subscriber IDs programmed into the control for each partition Ifa subscriber ID for a partition is not programmed disabling reports to that central station 13 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide phone number for that partition the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID in the LRR will not be transmitted If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers dual reporting then reporting through the LRR will be done in an alternating sequence The first event in the queue will be transmitted to the primary radio central station This event will then be transmitted to the secondary radio central station If the event was reported successfully via the control s dialer it will be deleted from the radio s transmission queue The control will then proceed to the next event in the queue If split
205. mber e g Relay Number 03 if supervised is zone 603 8 2 digit Device Address e g Device Address 01 if supervised is zone 801 The 4285 4286 VIP Module is zone 804 since its Device Address must be set to 4 Bell Output 1 Bell Output 2 Earth Ground J 2 Input 1 LRR Dialer 1 Dialer 2 Auxiliary Relay J 2 LRR Trigger Outputs 2nd Wireless Receiver not receiving signals ist Wireless Receiver not receiving signals Polling Loop short circuit 1 panic A key 3 panic C key panic B key 22 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Response types for zones are enabled in Zone Programming in 93 Menu Modesection of the Quick Start Guide Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 19 24 Hr Trouble or 05 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night Zone 976 is assigned to the built in auxiliary relay output for the purpose of allowing the operation of the relay to be bypassed Zone 977 is assigned to the J2 LRR Output Triggers for the purpose of allowing the operation of the outputs to be bypassed Zone Type Defaults Following are the zone type defaults for zones on the VISTA 32F B Zone Zone Type Zone Zone Type o0s 032 foo 0830 00 22 2 SECTION 23 Data Field Descriptions The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control If you have followed earlier instructions during the installation of the various devices many of these fields
206. ment usage and the specific wireless device being used Factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation e The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that point within the system e Some transmitters eg 5802 5802CP and 5803 contain long life but nonreplaceable batteries At the end of their life the complete unit must be replaced and a new serial number enrolled by the control e Button type transmitters e g 5801 5802 5802CP and 5803 should be periodically tested by the installer for battery life Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until they are ready to be enrolled After enrollment batteries need not be removed Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters Input Model Product ppa Deseription 5801 Wireless Panic UR or RF e Has four pushbuttons each with Transmitter a unique input loop code e Programmable responses e g Panic Arm Stay Arm Away Disarm etc e For arming disarming functions button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user Pendant Personal Has single pushbutton Emergency Transmitter Usually programmed for response type of 24 Hr Audible 5802CP Belt Clip Personal or 24 Hr Silent other zone Emergency Transmitter
207. mentary power supply Compatible Polling Loop Devices 4208U 8 Zone Expander Accommodates up to 8 class B zones 4208SNF 4208U 6 class B 2 class A zones 4208SNF via the polling loop DIP switch selectable serial ID 5 4208U optionally supports dip switch selectable zone 5 The first two zones can be either normal or fast response DIP switch selectable All zones are EOLR supervised with a 10k ohms resistor provided with the unit Surface mount 2 2 zone V plex Serial ID input module Zone Vplex Serial ID Rated for UL Commercial fire applications module Supervised zone Serial number preprogrammed no special programmer required Special programmer required Single zone mini Smallest SIM in family 3 8 x1 4 x1 3 4 SIM Vplex Serial Serial ID number preprogrammed no Interface Module Special programmer required Two zone SIM Vplex Two zone SIM 7 2 x3 8 x2 3 4 Serial Interface Rated for UL Commercial fire applications Module Serial ID number preprogrammed no Section 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Compatible Polling Loop Devices continued 4275E X Vplex PIR Dual element PIR with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Includes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications and can use the 1875PA Pet Alley mirror Built in selectable pulse count capability 4278E X Vplex Quad PIR Quad element PIR with built in RPM connects dir
208. must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary installations 1 24 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE 00 00 EA Em Enter the third pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm E nter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary installations 1 25 CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR 00 00 Lo Em Enter the fourth pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period of each other to cause an alarm E nter 00 00 to disable Must be 00 00 for UL burglary installations 23 11 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 12 1 26 PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY 00 00 00 00 i 1 EH i A B C D For each lettered key A C enter 00 to assign that key s respective panic function or enter a soeedkey macro number 01 32 to assign a particular macro to that key For the D key enter 00 to use the D key to select a macro to execute when key is pressed or enter a macro number 01 32 to execute a particular macro with the D key Instead of the 32 macros the A B and C keys can be programmed for any of 3 other functions Choice 33 fire sounder silence The key when pressed will silence fire alarms Choice 34 display next fire alarm The key when pressed will display the next fire alarm present in the system Choice 35 display previous fire alarm The key when pressed will dis
209. n Most printers either ignore the CTS DSR and CD signals or require them to be high i e 3 15VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 Connector Pins 5 6 and 8 respectively with respect to Ground Pin 7 The 4100SM Module sets these pins high If the printer being used will not operate with these pins high then clip the blue CTS white DSR or red CD jumpers on the 4100SM Module to set the corresponding signal floating Important pins on the RS232C cable are Pin 3 data out Pin 7 ground and Pin 20 DTR ready The DTR signal as measured at 4100SM TB1 should be high 9 5 14VDC when the printer IS powered properly connected on line and ready to print This signal will be low 0 1 5VDC when the printer is not powered not properly connected off line or out of paper The VISTA 32FB will not send printing data to the printer unless the DTR signal is high Section 17 Event Log Options Programming Event Log Options 1 With at least one alpha keypad 6139 6139R wired and set to a proper address temporarily apply power to the system Enter Data Field Programming Mode Installer Code 8 0 0 3 Program the following data fields 1 70 EVENT LOG TYPES 1 enable O disable for each type 1x71 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 0 12 hr 1 24 hr 1x72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE O disable 1 enable 1 73 PRINTER BAUD RATE 1 300 0 1200 4 Enter Report Code Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide to program r
210. n authorization level To Add an RF Key to an Existing User Toadd an RF key to an existing user or to change a user s global arm option first delete that user s code then re add the user code as described in the To ADD a Master Manage or Operator Code paragraph 28 6 Section 28 User Access Codes To Delete a Master Manager or Operator Code Enter your code H8 User number 02 75 your code again An Installer Master or Manager Code can be used instead of Installer Code If used instead of an Installer Code it must have a higher level of authority than the code being changed For example a Master Code can add a Manager or Operator level Code but cannot add another Master Code a Manager Code can add an Operator level Code but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code OK TO DELETE 03 The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete this 0 NO 1 YES user Press O NO or 1 YES If yes that user s code will be removed from all partitions to which it was assigned and all authorization levels and other information about that user will be deleted Note that a user can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority level A user cannot delete himself herself A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered If trying to delete from another partition the message USER XXX NOT DELETED will be displayed To EXIT the User Edit Mode Press either or or don
211. n for all keypads in that partition 144 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT 0 Enter 1to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad Enter Oif tamper detection is not desired If more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid sequence arm disarm etc the control panel will disable the wireless keypad The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired keypad 1 45 EXIT DELAY SOUNDING partition specific of Enter 1 if beeps from the keypads during exit delay are desired Enter O for no keypad sound during exit delay 147 CHIME ON BELL 1 partition specific of Enter 1 for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder If not desired enter 0 23 13 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 14 1 48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT 0 Enter the partition in which RF keypad is used 1 2 Enter Oif no RF keypad is used 1x49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND 1 W Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check in failure Enter 0 if audible trouble sounding is desired Must be O for UL 152 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM OFF partition specific 0 Enter Lif Cancel reports are to be sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm regardless of how much time has gone by Enter O if Cancel reports are to be sent within bell timeout period only 1 53 DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK 0 Enter 1 to disable the callback requirement for downloading Enter Oto require
212. n s information To see information for another partition or perform system functions in another partition use the GOTO command User Code partition number 1 2 The keypad will remain in the new partition until directed to go to another partition or until 120 seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity To return to the home partition enter x Partition number 0 Program data field 2 18 must be programmed to enable the GOTO function This is a partition specific field that must be set for each partition the user wants to access from another partition s keypad Viewing Capabilities of a User The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for the user number and the authority level for all partitions authorized Enter User Code The user s capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as follows Part 1 AO gt WHSE The user s Open Close report capability is shown by the dot TE following the authority level If Open Close is not enabled for a user the dot will not appear Viewing Zone Descriptors The alpha keypads can display all programmed descriptors which is useful to the installer when checking entries and can be helpful to the user when there is a need to identify zones To display descriptors the system must be disarmed and ready to arm Press and hold the READY key until the built in instructions for that key appear then release the key The zone descrip
213. nable Duress reporting a non zero report code must be assigned to Zone 992 duress in Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide ENTRY WARNING partition specific 1 Enter O for 3 short beeps or 1 for slow beeps that continue for the entire entry delay period BURG ALARM COMM DELAY partition specific 0 Enter O for no delay on burglary alarm communication Enter 1 for 16 second delay no delay on 24 hour reports Must be O for UL installations RESTORE REPORT TIMING 0 Enter Ofor instant Restore report as zone restores Enter 1 for reporting after bell timeout if zone restored Enter 2 for Restore report when system is subsequently disarmed Must be 2 for commercial fire or UL commercial burglary installation SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT i Em Em EE 15 partition specific Enter 00 09 B F 11 15 15 15 15 Enter the 3 or 4 digit number depending on report format for the secondary subscriber account 00 09 B F 11 15 Each number requires a 2 digit entry to allow entry of hexadecimal digits B F If a 3 digit number is to be used enter data only in the first 6 locations leaving the last two unfilled Default is 15 15 15 15 Erase the field by entering 90 Note This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used field 34 This account number can be the same as the primary account number Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions 1 17 LOBBY PARTITION 0
214. nataessiaipandsaes anc ties paca an RA oA O 8 5 Proorammind Wifeless Zones sieaa a O N 8 8 Checkout Procedure for Wireless ZONES ccsccccccessseeeeeceeseeeecceauseceeeeeeueceeeseauaecesessagaeeeesseeaageeeeeseeeesssaseeeess 8 9 Section 9 Relay Outputs insira aa a aaa aa aa 9 1 PSU AY BaS Oei a a ess Hating neues A a e 9 1 Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay MOdUI6S cccsssscccccsssseeeeecceeeseceeeeeeeseeeeesseeseeeeessuaaeeeeesseageeeeessaeseseesags 9 1 Prodor amming REI yS anaa a A 9 2 Section 10 4235 4286 VIP Module i siisssdenscannsssucceradacvuuacedstvnevarasavsavadendsscandsndsecsivasdcacevetansaunisuncsiasncessiarevenness 10 1 General Omat ON enn a a A a a a N r 10 1 Monting the VIE MOCUIG nireari a A 10 2 WING TNE VP MOdUG rs a A a O wae neice cnoes 10 2 Section 11 Audio Alarm Verification AAV Unit ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 11 1 GENTLE MACON ae a Maus tye eieaninlobicionesdvtianaiei nants 11 1 RAV M OGUIG Operat ON e a a a a Aa 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module CONNECCIONS cccccsssseececcsesseeeeeceeesseeeeeeseeaeeeeesseeaeeeeessuaaeeeeesssaaeeeeseeeenags 11 2 Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module OptionS cccccssseecceccesseeeeeeeeeseeeceesaeeseesesseaseeeeessaseeeess 11 2 Section 12 2 Trrgger OUTPUTS saisin A aAa Ai 12 1 GENER all 1 MROEIMAELOMN eae aa a A e aa tv elvanin wiiceioneadvtiganieunbannes 12 1 Remote Keypad Sounder Opera
215. ncluded at the end of each section We recommend this method to ensure that each device is working properly before proceeding to the next section It must also be used if you are making a particular addition to the system of one of these devices Each of the sections covering the installation of peripheral devices includes the programming for that device If you are an experienced user of ADEMCO products you may choose to wire and then program the entire system at once If so refer to The Mechanics of Programming and Data Fidd Descriptions in the Programming Guide that has been supplied after the hardware setup is complete The Programming Guide contains all of the information needed to program the system including a blank Programming Form However detailed programming for hardwired zones 1 8 polling loop expansion and wireless zones are contained in the following sections in this manual Basic Hardwired Zones 000 008 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion and Wirdess RF Zone Expansion 5800 RF Systems Without an understanding of the programming methodology you will not be able to successfully perform the required programming in each of these sections We therefore urge you to read the Mechanics of Programming and Data Fidd Descriptions in the separate Programming Guide before any programming is performed This manual uses various icons to denote critical notes and technical tips to assist you with the installation of this system These are easily
216. ne 6 to a burglary partition Program it for day trouble night alarm response a 05 when this bell is used by only one burglary partition Program it for 24 hr audible alarm response type 07 when this bell is used by more than one burglary partition e All wiring from AB12 to panel must be run in conduit eg1 L 7139 93 1149 S 73NYd OL pal 1139 93 1159 S TSNVd O eza1 9 INOZ OL peg 9 3NOZ OL AB12 OUTER BOX TAMPER SWITCHES INNER LINER Figure 14 1 External Sounder Connections Programming the Bell Outputs 1 Enter Data Field Program Mode Installer Code 8 0 0 2 Program the following data fields x08 Temporal Siren Pulse x13 Select Timeout for Bell 1 x16 Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell 1 1k47 EnableChimefor Bell 1 3x57 Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell 2 3 59 Enable Chime for Bell 2 3 15 Select either Steady or Pulsing for each bell circuit output 3x60 Select Timeout for Bell 2 3 Enter Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide to assign zones to bell outputs and or auxiliary relay 4 Exit Program Mode by pressing 99 The bell outputs will not respond if zones are not assigned to them For fire alarms the system will display FIRE ALARM SILENCED This message will also be displayed if the bell output is not supervised VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide SECTION 15 Auxiliary Relay In This Section Relay Functions
217. nel the panel will send its message If thereis an error in the transmission the receiver does not receive a valid message the kissoff frequency is not given by the central station receiver The panel will make a number of attempts to the primary telephone number and a number of attempts to the secondary telephone number if programmed to get a valid message through The number of attempts that are made to each number is determined by the programming of field 3x21 If the panel is not successful after its numerous attempts the keypad will display COMM FAILURE Reporting Formats The following chart defines the three sets of handshake kissoff frequencies that the panel supports and the different formats that can be sent for each FORMAT TIME HANDSHAKE TRANSMITS DATA KISSOFF TRANSMIT 1400H z 1900H z 1LOPPS 1400H z Under 15 secs Standard report Sescoa Rad 2300Hz 1800H z 20PPS 2300Hz Under 10 secs 3 1 Standard report 4 1 4 2 4 2 High Speed 1400 2300Hz DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz Contact ID 1400 2300Hz DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz 25 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 25 2 ADVISORY ADEMCO s Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all 32 zones of information as well as openings and closings for all 75 users to central stations equipped with the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software level 4 4 or higher Must be level 4 7 or higher to fully support all new VISTA 32F B report codes 685 software l
218. ng related report codes Event driven relay activation options are programmed using Rday Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide These actions arein response to a programmed action However relay activation can also be time driven and thus be used to initiate a desired action Time driven relay activation options are programmed using 80 Menu Mode Refer to Time Driven Event Programming later in this section for procedures Steps To Programming Scheduling Options This section contains examples of the worksheets only For complete worksheets see the Quick Start guide accompanying these Installation Instructions In order to use 80 Scheduling Menu Mode do the following Using the worksheets e Define time windows up to 20 e Define the daily open close schedules one schedule per day per partition e Define the holidays to be used by the system up to 16 e Define limitation of access times up to 8 schedules e Definethe time driven events up to 20 Note Temporary schedules are programmed using 81 Menu Mode Section 24 Scheduling Options Use 80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the following functions Scheduling Menu Structure Program the time windows Program the open close schedules Program the time driven events Program the access schedules To program schedules enter Scheduling Program Mode Installer Code 80 This mode can be entered only when all partitions are disa
219. ng window and one closing window for each day of the week e The schedule takes effect for up to one week after which it is automatically deactivated e This schedule is programmed using the 81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode Additional Schedules e Additional opening and closing schedules can be programmed using Time Driven Event Programming For example a schedule for normal store openings closings can be programmed with a daily open close schedule and another open close schedule for a lunch hour can be programmed using the time driven event schedule programming e Refer to TimeDriven Events later in this section for detailed information Open Close Reports by Exception e The system can help reduce communication traffic to the central station by using the Open Close Reports by Exception feature e The Open Close by Exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to the central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected time window Reports are only sent if the arm or disarm occurs outside the assigned time window e The system keeps a record of all openings closings in its event log e fa disarming occurs during a closing window a person who arms the system forgets something and has to reenter the Opening report although outside of the opening window will not be sent as long as that disarming occurs within the closing window e This option is programmed in partition specific program field 2x09 The follow
220. nger available as a protection zone 5 Programa 4204 Relay totrip on Zone Type Sys Op 60 Audio Alarm Verification see Relay Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide 6 Press 99 to exit Program Mode 11 2 Section 11 Audio Alarm Verification GRAY RED RJ31X INCOMING JACK TELCO LINE GREEN lt _ lt _ CALLER ID UNIT CONTROL EAGLE SUPPLIED CABLE CONTROL DIALER HEADER S S X Eon i mi e Ar S PREMISES gt ANSWERING D Q MACHINE AND S m PHONES Le ANSWERING ae MACHINE TERMINALS NOTE REFER TO AAV MODULE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE VEN TIP eI RING i VEY oe g Figure 11 1 Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections If the phone plug is disconnected at the control the premises phones will not operate If a problem exists remove the phone plug at the RJ31X to resume premises phone operation 11 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 11 4 SECTION 12 J2 Trigger Outputs In This Section General Information Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring 5140LED Indicator Module Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Event Log Printer Connections Direct Wire Downloading
221. nsist of a list of points that have been tested followed by a list of points that have not been tested Enter O NO if the results of this test are not to be reported A Walk Test Start and Walk Test End report will be sent in either case if programmed When the Test Mode is activated the system will sound fire bells or any bell having a non zero response type programmed in the 93 Menu Modeof the Quick Start Guide for three seconds The system will also send a Start of Walk Test message to the central station and will light all keypad indicators and display window segments to verify that they are working properly The keypads will then display FIRE WALK TEST IN PROGRESS and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while this test is active The system will build a list of all the fire zones response types 9 16 17 18 that need to be tested These points will be scrolled on the display For each point the keypad will display UNTST XXX where XXX is the point number followed by an alpha descriptor for the point If the auto test option has been selected the control panel will attempt to automatically test all of the polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9 or 16 For points that must be manually tested fault and reset each fire alarm sensor in turn Each action should cause keypads to beep and fire bells to ding The keypads will display the zone number and the associated alpha descriptor while the zone remains faulted
222. nstalling the Keypads In This Section Keypads That May Be Used Wiring to the Keypads Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads Mounting the Keypads Addressing the Keypads Prdiminary Checkout Procedure Keypads That May Be Used e 2 line alpha display 6139 gray or 6139R red Check with local AHJ for approval of keypad color e Upto 16 addressable keypads may be used in the system independent of auxiliary power considerations an auxiliary power supply may be required if the 1 amp aux output is exceeded Wiring to the Keypads 1 Determine wire gauge by referring to the wiring length gauge chart below 2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire runs The maximum wire run length from the control to a keypad which is homerun back to the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the following table Wire Run Length Table 22 gauge 450 feet 20 gauge 700 feet 18 gauge 1100 feet 16 gauge 1750 feet e The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad conductor cable is used 1000 feet if unshielded cable is run in conduit or if shielded cable is used e f more than one keypad is wired to a run then the above maximum lengths must be divided by the number of keypads on the run e g the maximum length is 225 feet if two keypads are wired on a 22 gauge run 5 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U
223. ntrol panel annunciated and reported as zone 804 Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are provided with the VIP Module In addition a Phone Access User s Guide is supplied with the VIP Module for the user of the system 10 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Mounting the VIP Module The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or if this is not possible on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it Pry off the VIP Module s cover before wiring 1 When the VIP Module is mounted inside the control cabinet attach it to the cabinet s interior surface with 2 faced adhesive tape The module s cover may be left off if it is mounted within the cabinet Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board 2 When the module is to be mounted outside the cabinet use the screw holes at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically 2 faced adhesive tape may be used if preferred The wires can be brought out from the side or back of the cabinet a round breakout is also available on the back When the mounting and wiring of the module is complete the module s cover can be attached with label affixed as indicated next 3 Affix the 4285 4286 connections label Supplied separately to the inside of the VIP Module s cover if the cover is used Otherwise affix the label to the inside of the control cabinet s door Wiring
224. o 0 fo 0 o fos 00 For a 00 1 0 ou 3 o a a fo o m o 012 00 w fe o fr o fe o p 00 014 00 04 00 14 00 00 a 05 00 15 00 03 00 01 06 03 00 01 00 0230s oo 02 03 0 00 08 00 02g fo 0 po 4 fo 0 fo 0 oe fo o jo o fo o0 M 00 or fB 2 07 fo o 2 0 fe w f w fa w f 00 030 o0 03 04 00 032 po 0 po o2 f 0 fo 0 C T 000 00 00 00 00 0 00 603 fo o __00__ 00__00_ 00__00_ 604 00 co fo o fo o fo oo 606 o o Jo 00 o o C 000 00 00 0 00 0 00 e po 0 po 0 fo 0 fo 0 eo 0000 to o 0 00 00 00 en _ 00_o9_ 99__00__ 09__00_ 00__00_ 612 00 fw o fo o fo o fo 00 614 oo o Jo o o eas 000 jo 00 0 oo 0 00 616 po 0 po 0 fo 0 fo 0 300 00 00 00 oo oo 00 E 0000000 Too 00 0000 25 8 Section 25 System Communication COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES ZONE LOW SPEED EXPRESSHIGH SPEED CONTACT ID 1st 2nd 1st 2nd Ist 2nd Ist 2nd 802 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 805 00 00 807 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 813 00 815 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 821 00 00 00 00 00 00 823 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 829 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 831 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 975 00 990 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 995 sid 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a Da D 60 00 999 TROUBLE 15 01 BYPASS 00 oo 00 oo o0 To program report codes see Report Code Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide 25 9 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide
225. o system events Can be programmed to activate using time intervals Can be used for additional style Y supervised bell outputs 4204CF only Can be activated manually using the 0 Relay Command Mode Can be supervised by control panel zones 601 616 Can each have an alpha descriptor assigned to it Optional VISTA Interactive Phone Module Supports the ADEMCO 4285 4286 VIP Module This permits access to the security system to do the following UL Obtain system status information Arm and disarm security system Control relays The 4285 4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA 32FB Control Panel in a UL commercial installation Optional 24 Volt Power Supply Compatible with the PS24 Power Supply Module which supplies two 24VF W 1 7A full wave rectified unfiltered outputs The module is used to supply power to Alarm notification appliances sirens strobes etc Auxiliary devices that can operate using full wave rectified unfiltered voltage The optional PS24 Power Supply Module may only be used with the optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit and the optional 1451 24 dual 18VAC 30VAC secondary wired in transformer The PS24 is designed to mount inside the VISTA ULKT enclosure either by itself or along with the VISTA 32FB PC Board and is powered from the 1451 24 transformer s 30VAC winding Section 1 General Description Optional Backup Dialer ae use of 5140DLM Backup Dialer for connecting to a second sup
226. o when the action Is to take place relative to the time window Select from Activation Description time Beginning of time window End of time window 3 During time window active period only i e on at beginning of window off at end This can be used in conjunction with the arm disarm or bypass commands to control a part of the system during the window For example if bypass is selected to activate during the window the zones in the zone list will be bypassed at the beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end of the window Beginning and end of time window e g a Coffee break buzzer In this example if relay pulse is selected the relay will pulse for 2 seconds at the beginning of the window signaling the beginning of the coffee break At the end of the window it will pulse again signaling the end of coffee break Time Driven Event Programming The following schedules can be used to activate outputs bypass zones arm disarm the system etc based on a time schedule Up to 20 events can be programmed for the system Time windows must first be defined in order to be used to trigger events If using time driven events to control relays the following menu items must first be programmed using Relay Programming in the 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide Enter Relay No reference identification number Relay Group if applicable Relay Type 4204 or none ECP Address Relay No if 4204 relays
227. oading phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER ee ee Enter eight digits 00 09 A F 10 15 Default is 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Only applicable if downloading will be utilized Make entries as 2 digit numbers as follows OO 0 O02 2 044 06 6 O08 8 10 A 12 C 14 4 Ol 1 0353 055 O7 09 9 1158 1350 1 DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES Dialer System Not Remote Remote Remote Upload Download Shutdown Shutdown Used Bypass Disarm Arm Program Program Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled through the keypad for usage by Compass downloading software Disabling a function means that you will not be able to perform that function from Compass Enter 1 to enable a function and O to disable a function See field 1 53 to disable the Download Callback option For commercial fire and UL commercial burglary Installations all entries must be O Default is 11011111 PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS partition specific poo Entering a zone number 001 032 prevents that zone from being bypassed by the user Enter 000 if this feature is not desired all zones can be bypassed ENABLE OPEN CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE partition specific 1 Enter 1 if Open Close reporting for the installer is desired Otherwise enter 0 40 OPEN CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH 0 41 Enter 1 to enable Open Close reporting for th
228. ocal authority 315 ALARM SOUNDS BELL 1 2 1 0 Bell 1 Bell 2 Enter Ofor pulsing 1 for steady output on Bell Outputs 1 and 2 If pulsing is selected field 08 applies 3x16 ZONE TYPES 17 and 18 DELAY oo Enter 01 15 times 2 seconds if a delay is desired for waterflow and fire supervisory zones This may help prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow Otherwise enter 00 3x17 ZONE 6 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE of Enter 1 to enable Zone 6 as a tamper zone Bell Tamper 3x18 EXTENDED DELAY FOR TYPES 17 and 18 of This option allows the delay programmed in field 3x16 for waterflow and fire supervisory zones to be extended by 4 times Enter 1 to multiply delay by 4 Enter Oto use delay programmed in field 3 16 UL For a waterflow alarm total maximum allowable time delay device and panel is 90 seconds For a supervisory signal total maximum allowable time delay device and panel is 200 seconds 3x19 AUXILIARY INPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE al Enter 1 to enable pins 5 and 9 as printer RXD and DTR Enter 0 if pins are to function as selected in 3 20 23 18 Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions 3 20 TRIGGER OUTPUTS FUNCTION SELECTION 0 Enter O for Long Range Radio outputs and Remote Keypad Sounder Enter 1 for limited LORRA outputs and Keyswitch LEDs Enter 2 for LORRA Fire output only and 5140LED connection 3 21 MAX OF DIALER ATTEMPTS 8 Enter the maximum number of attempts
229. of which consists of two time windows for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays typically one for an opening time window and the second for a closing time window A user required to follow a schedule would be assigned to an access group of the same number 1 8 i e schedule 1 group 1 The user s access code is assigned to a group when that user is added to the system If no limitations apply enter O Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule Acc Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol Sch W1 w2 W1 w2 W1 w2 W1 w2 W1 w2 W1 w2 W1 w2 W1 W2 ptt fT E E E a S E T A a E eS CS CSSS S S S S T 3 81 a tT ty ft tt S Note The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule Limitation of Access Schedules Programming To program access schedules do the following Enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code 80 After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press O until the ACCESS SCHED prompt appears Access Sched Enter 1 to program access schedules 1Yes O No 0 ACCESS SCHED Enter the access control schedule number between O1 and 08 01 08 00 Quit 01 Press x to accept entry Enter 00 at the ACCESS SCHED prompt to quit the access control menus and display the QUIT prompt MON A1 Window 1 Enter the first time window number 01 20 for this access 00 00 00 00 00 schedule fo
230. ompt above e Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition When all partitions have been displayed the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which access has been assigned and will display the user number authority level open close and global arm options that were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted access Part 1 AO X WHSE Note that the G following the authority level indicates that the User 03 Auth 3G Global Arm feature is enabled for this user in the displayed et partition and that the period at the end of the second line indicates Open Close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed partition The indicates the partition from which the user may be changed or deleted To CHANGE a Master Manager or Operator Code Enter Installer code 8 User number 02 75 new user s code An Installer Master or Manager Code can be used instead of Installer Code If used instead of an Installer Code it must have a higher level of authority than the code being changed For example a Master Code can add a Manager or Operator level Code but cannot add another Master Code a Manager Code can add an Operator level Code but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code User Number 03 The system detects that the user number is already assigned NEW USER and will prompt if this is a new user Press O NO The system will then confirm that the change is allowed based o
231. on of an alarm condition if that service is connected 29 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Arming Functions The following is a brief list of system commands F or detailed information concerning system functions refer to the User s Manual Display Faulted Before arming the system must bein the READY condition all Zones zones must be intact If the NOT READY message appears press the READY xX key to display faulted zones Arming Away Enter code 2 AWAY Arming Stay Enter code 3 STAY all zones designated as zone types 4 and 10 will be automatically bypassed Arming Instant Enter code 7 INSTANT same as STAY without entry delay Arming Enter code 4 MAXIMUM same as AWAY without entry delay Maximum Disarming Enter code 1 OFF Bypassing Zones Enter code 6 BYPASS 3 digit zone number To automatically bypass all faulted zones use Quick Bypass method Enter code BYPASS 1 Chime Mode Enter code 9 CHIME To turn Chime Mode off Enter code CHIME again Quick Arming Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled field 29 the key can be pressed instead of entering the security code for any of the arming procedures Away Stay Instant Maximum etc A user code other than the Installer Code must be programmed into the system in order for the Quick Arm feature to work SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES Mode Features for Each Arming Mode e Exit Delay Entry Delay Perim
232. on with a magnet 5817 Multi Point Universal Transmitter e Has three unique input loop codes one for a Primary contact loop with programmable options the others for two Auxiliary closed circuit contact loops Recessed Transmitter Reed switch magnetic contact sensor that is easily concealed in the frame and edge of a door or window Has a single unique input loop code 8 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters continued 5819 Shock Sensor 5827 Wireless Keypad 5827BD Wireless Bi directional House ID Keypad 5849 Glassbreak Detector F 5890 PIR Detector Programming Wireless Zones Shock sensor analyzer for ADEMCO Inertial Cross Bar Ultrak Litton Inertiaguard shock sensors Built in Reed magnetic contact Programmable analyzer responses Can be used to turn the burglary protection on and off Features the same built in panic functions as wired keypads The keypad is identified as zone 000 on wired keypads when it transmits with a low battery Used with 5800TM Module Operates the system similarly to wired keypads Can indicate system status via its 3 LEDs and sounder Includes 3 panic keys House ID must be set Requires 5800TM Transmitter Module must be enabled in 93 Menu Mode Device Programming and assigned toa partition in 1 48 Requires both sound and shock of breaking glass to cause alarm to be
233. onnects to the polling loop and is powered from panel s auxiliary power or by a separate power supply with battery backup Models 7500 and 9500 Glassbreak Detectors are not UL Listed SECTION 8 Wireless Zone Expansion In This Section Common Characteristics of Wirdess Zones Wirdess Systems Available RF System Operation and Supervision RF System Installation Advisories Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Reca ver Installing the 5800TM Module House D Sniffer Mode 5800 Series Transmitter Setup Checkout Procedure for Wirdess Zones Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones e Supervised by control panel for check in signals except certain nonsupervised transmitters e Can be individually assigned to either of two partitions e Can be individually assigned to bell outputs and or aux relay e Can be individually assigned to access points U L Wireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations Wireless Systems Available The VISTA 32FB supports only the 5800 series wireless system that may be used exclusively or in addition to hardwire and or polling loop zones The following receivers may be used with this system Each may support the number of zones shown below Note that the VISTA 32FB can support up to a maximum of 32 zones so the number of wireless zones that can be used will be decreased by the number of hardwire and polling loop zones that are defined 8 1 VISTA 32FB Ins
234. ons provided with your radio for instructions on setting the zone 1 and 2 levels Figures 12 5a b and c show how to make connections to the 7720 7720ULF and 7920SE Long Range Radios 7720 WIRING DIAGRAM 4142TR CABLE 4142TR CABLE 5 WIRE gt lt COLORS m 7720 RADIO SEE 7720 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION USE 7720 ULF INSTEAD INFORMATION YELLOW FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS SILENT PANIC DURESS ALARM NOTES e MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C COM RUN WIRING FROM C COM TO 7720 IN CONDUIT Figure 12 5a Connections to 7720 Long Range Radio Section 12 J 2 Trigger Outputs 7720 ULF WIRING DIAGRAM J2 CONNECTOR RADIO FAULT PROGRAM FOR SHORT ON FAULT 7720 ULF RADIO SEE 7720 ULF INSTRUCTIONS FOR MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION peas INFORMATION CABLE GROUND INPUT 1 4142TR CABLE 3 WIRE COLORS YELLOW CUT RESISTOR JUMPERS Z1 Z5 DO NOT USE 2k EOL RESISTOR PROGRAM 7720 ULF FOR SLAVE OPERATION PROGRAM ZONES 1 4 AS ALARM ZONES AND ZONE 5 AS A TROUBLE ZONE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 09099090909 FIRE ALARM FIRE SUPERVISORY BURG AUDIBLE PANIC ALARM TROUBLE ZONE TROUBLE TELCO FAULT ETC SILENT PANIC DURESS ALARM NOTES e MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C COM RUN WIRING FROM C COM TO 7720ULF IN CONDUIT Figure 12 5b Connections to 7720ULF Long Range Radio J2 CONNECTOR t 4142TR CABL
235. ons s es 24 6 Programming System Wide Data Fields 0 20 3 Programming the Control for the Long Range Radiol13 2 PS24 Power Supply Module ccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 OUR AN eaa ool ee r a Seuss 28 1 Que K ARM casncrasceinasrvnstenacetcessumaceentotisouniumtonseait 23 4 QUICK AMINO cierne nandai 29 2 RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT oseese 23 2 REVRYVSET UP ERROR armitan 30 5 REAL TIME CLOCK aisits a 17 3 Redl TITS 1G l ORK T 27 1 RECEIVER TYPE criai aA 23 13 Recent Close Report sssssesssrrrrrreessrnrrrrreesrrrrrrreeene 3 2 Recommendations For Smoke And Heat Detectors ji Regulatory Agency Statements sesssssseseesserrrerreesn A 1 Relay COMMAMNAS spein e 24 11 REAY QUEDUES raien aa 9 1 RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES se 23 15 RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS cee 23 15 Remote Keypad Sounder ssessssrressesssrnrrrreessrrrrenne 12 2 Remote Point MOdUI6S cccccssssseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeas 7 1 Reporting F OFIMAUS cani aaa 25 1 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 1 23 19 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 2 23 19 RESTORE REPORT TIMING coniro 23 10 PSE Gl ISAM ING rrn r iaaea 24 2 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK IN INTERVAL 23 12 RF System Installation Advisories cccccccsseseeeeeees 8 3 RF System Operation and Supervision ss ssesesree 8 2 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN INTERVAL 23 12 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE 23 12 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND
236. oop CONTROL ss PANEL N Extension Loop 2 Extension Loop 8 Extension Loop Limits Each individual loop has the same limits as the input loop Up to 8 modules may be connected in parallel Extension loops will be electrically isolated if blue jumper on each 4297 is left intact noel Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits No more than 120 devices combined on all loops To calculate the maximum wire run allowed on each extension loop 1 Determine the total wire length of all input loops combined 2 Subtract this number from 6400 ft 3200 ft for shielded cable or unshielded cable in conduit The result is the maximum wire run length for each extension loop Figure 7 2b Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules Section 7 2 Wire Polling Loop Expansion Polling Loop Supervision A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble condition on its supervisory zone zone 997 This reports as a trouble condition only As such a polling loop should be assigned either zone type 05 or type 19 if annunciation as a trouble condition is desired If a device on the polling loop fails the panel cannot see that device the partition or partitions that use the device will display a trouble condition for all zones associated with the device If the panel is armed when a device fails the zones associated with that device will cause an alarm on the corresponding partition s except f
237. or the units with tamper switches arein place Once the situation has been corrected enter the User Code OFF sequence twice to clear the trouble 4 f the following is displayed press the key to display the faulted zone s DISARMED Press to show faults 5 Restore any faulted zone s as necessary When the DISARMED READY TO ARM message is displayed you can proceed to the next step 6 Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it is being monitored by the system Each time a zone is faulted the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone Tripping fire and panic zones will cause external sounders to sound and may 7 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide trigger the dialer When each zone is restored the READY TO ARM message should appear again If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition s kKeypad s check both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment When the proper displays on the keypad s are received the polling loop zones in the system are functioning properly 7 Power down and continue to the next section e The 4190WH SN right loop must not be used and the left loop must be EOLR supervised U L e The 4278 Auxiliary Sensor Loop cannot be used e The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA 32FB Auxiliary Power Output or from a UL Listed supple
238. or zone types 05 06 07 08 and 09 Zone types 05 06 07 08 and 09 are reported as check trouble if the device fails while the system is armed A trouble on zone 997 will not prevent a partition from being armed as long as all polling loop zones on that partition are bypassed Programming Polling Loop Zones Each polling loop zone must be programmed into the system which assigns characteristics that define the way the system responds to faults on that zone Refer to 93 Menu Modein the Quick Start Guide for instructions on programming polling loop zones Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones After installation of all polling loop zones is complete power has been applied to the system and the zones have been programmed each partition of the security system should be checked as follows 1 Besurethat all devices and sensors connected to the polling loop are not in a faulted state Doors and windows with contacts should be closed PI Rs should be covered use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary 2 With all hardwired and polling loop zones intact the alpha keypads connected to the system should display DISARMED READY TO ARM 3 Ifthe keypad s begins beeping and displays the word CHECK or TRBL along with a zone or zone numbers the system either does not see the displayed zone s or the tamper switches are tripped Please check the DIP switch settings for the zone s the connections and or that the covers f
239. ormer enclosure 4 Connect the transformer s 18VAC Blue flying leads that emerge from the top of the enclosure to the VISTA 32F B s AC terminals Terminals 1 and 2 5 Makeearth ground connections as specified below 19 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Earth Ground Connections The VISTA 32FB requires connection to a good earth ground in order to provide proper 120VAC shock hazard protection lightening transient protection and earth ground fault detection Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper earth grounding methods When using the built in transformer shipped with the VISTA 32F B follow the steps below to make connections to earth ground 1 Run an earth ground wire into the transformer enclosure via the same knockout used for 120VAC wiring 2 Usea wire nut not supplied to splice this earth ground wire to the green flying lead located inside of and bonded to the transformer enclosure 3 Connect the green flying lead that emerges from the top of the transformer enclosure to the VISTA 32F B s earth ground terminal Terminal 30 4 Replace the transformer enclosure cover after wiring is complete When using the optional 1451 transformer follow the steps below to make connections to earth ground 1 Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 transformer to a good earth ground use grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code Use a green wire nut Supplied to secur
240. ort detection within 90 seconds of reset causes fire alarm Type 17 Fire Waterflow An open on this zone causes a trouble response Shorts that remain present longer than the programmed time delay fields 3x16 and 3 18 cause a fire alarm response This zone can be silenced by pressing Code OFF or when the waterflow restores programmed in field 3x14 Type 18 Fire Supervisory This zone type is assigned to a zone having sensors that monitor fire sprinkler systems i e PIV switches etc A short on this zone causes a supervisory response Opens can be programmed either for a trouble or a Supervisory response based on the entry in data field 3 13 Type 19 24 Hour Trouble An open or short on this zone type causes a trouble response No external alarm sounders are activated Type 20 Arm STAY This iS a special purpose zone type used with 5800 Series wireless transmitters which will result in arming the system in the STAY Mode when the zone is activated Type 21 Arm AWAY This iS a special purpose zone type used with 5800 Series wireless transmitters which will result in arming the system in the AWAY Mode when the zone is activated Type 22 Disarm This iS a special purpose zone type used with 5800 Series wireless transmitters which will result in disarming the system when the zone Is activated Type 23 No Alarm Response This zone type can be used on a zone when an output relay action is desired but with no accompany
241. ow to a day of the week windows are entered as 2 digit entries Mon Jue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol Op CI Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl 01 04 01 04 01 04 01 04 01 05 02 03 00 00 00 00 Note 00 is entered for those days on which the store is closed Employees can arm and disarm the system when programmed within the open and close time windows without causing a report to be sent to the central station reporting by exception field 2x09 The system can be programmed to automatically arm disarm in case an employee fails to arm disarm manually auto arm auto disarm Open Close Definitions General e The open close scheduling is controlled by one of three schedules Each schedule consists of one time window for openings and one time window for closings e There are three types of schedules available Daily Holiday and Temporary Daily Schedule e Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one opening window and one closing window per day Holiday Schedule e A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on selected holidays throughout the year 24 4 Section 24 Scheduling Options e The opening and closing windows are programmed in the daily schedule but the holidays themselves are defined in Holiday Schedule Programming in 80 Menu Mode Temporary Schedule e Thetemporary schedule provides a method for the end user to override the daily and holiday schedules e t consists of one openi
242. owing an alarm 1 Connect 2 wire smoke detectors across zone 1 and or zone 2 terminals 15 through 18 as shown in Figure 6 1 Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors 2 If EOL resistors are presently connected across zone 1 and zone 2 terminals remove them The EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at the last detector 2K EOLR resistors must be used on fire zones standard discrete 2K EOL resistors may be used on burglary and panic zones and must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at the last detector The alarm current provided by zones 1 and 2 will support only one smoke detector each in the alarmed state 2 WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR W104 SINHO 0002 Figure6 1 2 Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1 can also be connected to Zone 2 terminals 17 and 18 Section 6 Basic Hardwired Zones Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors UL Zone 1 and zone 2 may each contain up to 16 2 wire smoke detectors A list of approved smoke detectors are contained in the following table DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2400 lonization duct detector System Sensor 1451DH w DH400 base Photoelectric w heat System Sensor 2400TH lonization direct wire System Sensor 1100 sensor direct wire Photoelectric w B401B base System Sensor 2451 lonization w B110LP base System Sensor 1151 lonization direct wire Syst
243. perate a partition with one of the three Operator authority levels A through C in the table below Section 28 User Access Codes Functions Permitted Operator A Arm Disarm Bypass Operator C Arm Disarm only if armed with same code e Operator C Sometimes known as the Babysitter Code cannot disarm the system unless the system was armed with that code This code is usually assigned to persons who may have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific times only e g a babysitter needs to control the system only when babysitting Level 6 Duress Codes e Sends a silent alarm toa central monitoring station if the user is being forced to disarm or arm the system under threat only useful if the system is connected to a central station e When the system s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another communication s media Derived Channel Long Range Radio note that duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals silent panic whereas duress has its own unique report when digitally communicated e Assigned on a partition by partition basis and can be any code or codes desired e Will disarm or arm the system but will also send a silent alarm tothe central station if service is connected There will be no indication at the keypad that an alarm was sent Duress Reporting Note A non zero report code for zone 992 duress must be programmed and partition specific field 85 duress location enabled to enable
244. play the previous fire alarm present in the system Note Choices 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with field 3x01 Fire Display Lock 1 28 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND 0 E Enter O if audible beep and display upon RF transmitter low battery condition is desired only in disarmed state Enter 1 if audible beep and display is desired in both armed and disarmed states Must be 1 for UL 1 29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORTING 0 Enter Lif a Trouble message for RF transmitter low battery condition is to be sent to the central station Enter Oif no report for transmitter low battery is desired Note that a Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure independent of this selection Must be 1 for UL 1 30 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK IN INTERVAL 02 a E nter the check in monitoring interval in 2 hour increments E nter 02 15 times 2 hours 4 30 hours Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered will result in activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related communication reports Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision Max 2 4hr for UL 1x31 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN INTERVAL 02 a E nter the check in monitoring interval in 2 hour increments E nter 02 15 times 2 hours 4 30 hours Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time entered will result in a t
245. pn Cls Low Batt Enter O for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone number default is O Note E xpanded overrides 4 2 format USE ONLY LRR LONG RANGE RADIO 0 Enter Lif the built in dialer is not being used and only the LRR will be used to communicate Otherwise enter 0 USE LRR LONG RANGE RADIO IF DIALER FAILS 0 Enter Lif LRR is to be used as a backup to the built in dialer if the dialer fails The radio messages begin transmitting the same time as the dialer Once the dialer receives a kissoff the LRR will stop transmitting no matter where it might be within its sequence Otherwise enter 0 23 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 23 8 58 59 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 1 CATEGORY ENABLE Et hy ba La Lo Alm Trbl Byp Opn Cls_ Syst Test Enter 1 to enable reports for primary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio Otherwise enter 0 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION 2 CATEGORY ENABLE O L LILI WI UU Alm Trbl Byp Opn Cls_ Syst Test Enter 1 to enable reports for secondary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio Otherwise enter O ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED 0 Enter Lif the alphanumeric pager interface is installed Otherwise enter O PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS This field is used to enter the alphanumeric paging service phone number for Alarm reports Enter up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13
246. r Failure If the POWER indicator is off and the message AC LOSS is displayed the keypad is operating on battery power only Check to see that the circuit breaker for the branch circuit that your system s transformer is wired to has not been accidentally turned off Instruct the user to call a service representative immediately if AC power cannot be restored Turning the System Over to the User e Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its functions as well as the User s Manual supplied e In particular explain the operation of each zone entry exit perimeter interior fire etc Be sure the user understands how to operate any emergency feature s programmed into the system To the Installer 30 6 Regular maintenance and inspection at least annually by the installer and frequent testing by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm system The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a regular maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the proper operation and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts Recommendations must be included for a specific program of frequent testing at least weekly to ensure the system s proper operation at all times Contacting Technical Support PLEASE before you call Technical Support be sure to e READ THE INSTRUCTIONS e Check all wiring connections e Determ
247. r longer e Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be supervised Bell Circuit Supervision To supervise bell circuits do the following e Install a 2K EOL resistor Model 610 7 supplied across the last notification appliance on each bell output to be supervised 14 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide e Program Zones 970 Bell 1 and 971 Bell 2 for 24 Hr Trouble response Zone type 19 See Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide To unsupervise bell circuits do the following e Cut the white jumpers W1 for Bell 1 and or W4 for Bell 2 on the main PCB e Program zones 970 Bell 1 and 971 Bell 2 for a response type of 00 to disable Supervision See Zone Programming in 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide e Donot install the EOL resistor s across the unsupervised output s Wiring Bell Outputs By default Bell 1 is set to operate as an unsupervised burglary bell output Any UL Listed nonpolarized burglary indicating device rated for 10 14 VDC operation on this output can be used Note that a local burglary Grade A listing requires that a bell in a tamper protected housing be used such as ADE MCO AB12 and that bell wiring be run in conduit By default Bell 2 is set to operate as a Supervised fire bell output Note that the panel Supervises this wiring for open short and earth ground faults Any UL Listed pola
248. r the displayed day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press x to continue MON A1 Window 2 Enter the second time window number from 01 20 for this 00 00 00 00 00 access schedule for the displayed day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue TUE A1 Window 1 Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week When the 00 00 00 00 00 last day of the week has been programmed the windows for holidays may be entered 24 16 Section 24 Scheduling Options Hol A1 Window 1 Enter the first time window number for holidays for this access 00 00 00 00 00 schedule As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press x to continue Hol A1 Window 2 Enter the second time window number for holidays for this 00 00 00 00 00 access schedule As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Quit Enter Oat the QUIT prompt to return to the main menu 1 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode Press to continue Temporary Schedules Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule which will override the regular open close schedule and the holiday schedule This schedule takes effect as soon as it is programmed and remains active for up to one
249. re and or burglary and panic and or trouble conditions at all other keypad partitions selectable option Certain system options selectable for each partition such as entry exit delay and Subscriber account number User Codes Accommodates 75 user codes all of which can operate any or all partitions Certain characteristics must be assigned to each user code which are as follows Authority level Master Manager or several other Operator levels Opening Closing central station reporting option What partitions the code can operate Global arming capability ability to arm all partitions the code has access to in one command Use of an RF button to arm and disarm the system RF button must first be enrolled in the system Peripheral Devices Supports up to 31 addressable devices which can be any combination of keypads 6139 6139R RF receivers 5881 relay modules 4204 4204CF and 4285 4286 VIP Module Peripheral devices have the following characteristics Each device is physically set to an individual address according to the device s instructions Each device is enabled in the system using the Device Programming Mode covered later in this manual Keypad Panic Keys Accommodates three keypad panic keys 1 A B and 3 C Designated as zones 995 1 996 3 and 999 Activated by wired and wireless keypads Activated and reported separately by partition and distinguished by su
250. re run may exceed the lengths given in the table to follow In addition no more than 64mA may be drawn on any individual wire run When a star configuration is used the total length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft 2000 ft if using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire Twisted pair is recommended for all normal wire runs Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs 22 gauge 650 feet 20 gauge 950 feet 18 gauge 1500 feet 16 gauge 2400 feet When running polling loop wires they must not be run within 6 of AC power telephone or intercom wiring Since the polling loop is carrying data between the control panel and the devices interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication The polling loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines If this spacing cannot be achieved shielded wire must be used Note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is used 2 Wire each device to the polling loop making sure to use correct polarity when making connections refer to the device s instructions If serial number devices are being used and the control is to enroll each serial number automatically wire no more than 24 of these devices to the control at a time Then power up and program them as described in Zone Programming in the 93 Menu Mode Programming section of the Quick Start Guide before connecting the next 25 devices Leave previously
251. rements 24 hour backup The California State Fire Marshal has published new regulations that require all residential fire alarm control panels installed after J une 30 1993 to be provided with a backup battery This backup battery must have sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the intended standby condition followed by at least four minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition Be sure to size the battery to meet this requirement VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC STATEMENT This equipment has been tested to FCC requirements and has been found acceptable for use The FCC requires the following statement for your information This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio and television reception It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user
252. rized fire indicating device rated for 10 14 VDC operation may be used on this output Observe polarity when wiring polarized devices Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices Compatible devices are listed below The wiring connections follow this chart Model Description beige PA400R red at 90 dB 10 feet System Sensor SS1215 ADA Strobe Wheelock MT4 12 MS VFR Horn Strobe GentexGxS245 SOE GentexSHG z15 HorniStrobe O o Section 14 External Sounders Shows wiring for bell outputs configured using factory default programming selections BELL 1 FACTORY DEFAULTS Bell 1 is configured as a burglary bell circuit e Use nonpolarized Grade A indicating devices e g ADEMCO No AB12 see below e Wiring is not supervised cut white jumper W1 on main PCB e Activates for zones 3 8 alarms by default zones 3 8 are assigned to burglary partition 1 e Steady alarm output e 16 minute timeout BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS Bell 2 is configured as a fire bell circuit e Use polarized indicating devices e Class B open short supervision e 24 hr trouble response to faults e Activates for zones 1 2 alarms by default 2k EOLR zones 1 2 are assigned to fire partition 3 Model 610 7 e Pulsed alarm output e No timeout AB12 WIRING NOTES e Disconnect the AB12 s factory wired connection from its terminal 4 to its outer box e Set field 3 17 to 1 to enable zone 6 tamper AB12 BELL BOX WIRING function e Assign zo
253. rmed There are 5 sections of scheduling menus as shown below Entering 1 at a displayed main menu prompt will select that menu section Prompts for programming that scheduling feature will then appear Enter Oto skip a section and display the next menu option Time Window 1 Yes O No O C Schedules 1 Yes O No Holidays 1Yes O No Timed Events 1Yes O No Access Sched 1 Yes O No Quit 1 Yes O No 0 0 0 0 0 0 Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode this prompt will appear Enter 1 to program time windows Refer to Time Windows Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter Oto move to the O C SCHEDULES prompt Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules Refer to Open Close Schedules Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter O to move to the HOLIDAYS prompt Enter 1 to program holiday schedules Refer to Holiday Schedule Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter Oto move tothe TIMED EVENTS prompt Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs additional schedules and other system functions Refer to Time Driven Event Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter O to move to the ACCESS SCHED prompt Enter 1to program access schedules Refer to Limitation of Access Schedules Programming later in this section for detailed procedures Enter Oto move to the QUIT prompt Enter 1 to quit 80
254. rning or by manually extending the closing arming time window with a keypad command e Thesystem can also automatically bypass any open zones when auto arming Auto Arm Delay e Auto arm delay provides a delay grace period before auto arming e t starts at the end of the closing time window e Thedelay is set in 4 minute increments up to 56 minutes in partition specific program field 205 e Atthe expiration of this delay the auto arm warning will start Auto Arm Warning e The auto arm warning causes the keypad sounder to warn the user of an impending auto arm e Thewarning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to the arming in partition specific program field 206 e During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds and displays AUTO ARM ALERT During the last 60 seconds the keypads begin to beep every 5 seconds e The panel arms at the conclusion of the auto arm warning period Extend Closing Window e A user can manually delay the arm closing time window by 1 or 2 hours e This is done by entering a keypad command User Code 82 which then prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of 1 or 2 e This feature is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual e The auto arm delay and warning periods will begin at the end of the extension Force Arm e The force arm option causes the panel to attempt to bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming panel will perform a force arm
255. rol The system has the capability to utilize an access control relay in each partition The relay must be enabled in Relay Programming and programmed in data field 1 76 To activate this relay the user enters User Code O The relay will pulse for two seconds Delaying Closing Time If open close schedules are used end users can manually delay closing time by extending the closing window by 1 or 2 hours This is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual The user must have an authority level of Manager or higher To extend the closing window enter User code 82 Closing Delay Enter the number of hours 1 or 2 by which the end of the Hit 0 2 Hours closing window should be extended Note that the delay is from the scheduled closing time not from the current time Press to accept entry and exit this mode Press to exit this mode without changes The system will send an Access Schedule Change report to the central station when the closing window is extended if programmed An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set However a 1 hour delay can be increased to 2 hours This is to prevent the user from deleting the delay after the normal window expires thereby missing the end of the window 29 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Partition GOTO Commands Each keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes and will show only that partitio
256. rouble response and related communication report Enter 00 to disable transmitter supervision Max 2 4hr for UL Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions 1 33 TOUCH TONE W ROTARY BACKUP 0 Enter 1 to enable rotary backup dialing if communicator is not successful in dialing using Touch tone DTMF on first attempt Enter O if this option is not desired 1 34 COMM SPLIT REPORT SELECTION 0 This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or secondary phone number Enter 0 1 or 2 in accordance with the following 0 split reporting disabled 1 Alarm Alarm Restore and Cancel reports sent to primary telco number all others to secondary telco number 2 Open Close and Test reports sent to secondary telco number and all other reports to primary 3 Fire Alarms and Fire Restore reports sent to primary telco number all reports to secondary See 51 for split dual reporting combinations 1 42 CALL WAITING DEFEAT 0 Enter 1 for the panel to defeat Call Waiting on the first attempt DO NOT enable unless Call Waiting is being used Otherwise enter O 1 43 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING partition specific 0 Enter Lif backlighting for the keypad display is to remain on at all times Enter O if the display should remain unlit unless a key is pressed The backlighting then turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity Note that when a key is pressed display backlighting turns o
257. rts for any user Is the only code that can be used to enter Program Mode The Installer Code can be prevented from re entering the Program Mode by exiting using 98 The only way to access Programming Mode if this done is by powering down the system powering up again and then pressing both the and keys at the same time within 30 seconds of power up Must program at least one Master Code during initial installation Master Codes are intended for use by the primary user s of the system Level 1 Master Codes Can perform all normal system functions Can be used to assign up to 73 lower level codes which can be used by other users of the system Cannot assign anybody a level of O or 1 May change personal code Can add delete or change Manager or Operator Codes Each user s code can be individually eliminated or changed at any time Open Close reporting of added users is the same as that of the Master who is adding the new user Level 2 Manager Codes Levels 3 5 Can perform all system functions arm disarm bypass etc programmed by Master May add delete or change other users of the system below this level Manager cannot assign anybody a level of 0 1 or 2 May change personal code Open Close reporting of added users is the same as that of the Manager who is adding the new user Operator Codes Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned but cannot add or modify any user code May o
258. ry installations When used with the optional VISTA ULKT attack resistant enclosure kit and the optional 1451 wired in transformer the VISTA 32FB may also be used in listed commercial burglary installations The following general requirements apply to all UL installations The UL864 and UL609 UL365 UL611 UL610 requirements listed below apply to UL commercial fire and commercial burglary installations respectively All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person s All partitions must be part of one building at one street address The audible alarm device s must be placed where it they can be heard by all partitions The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access This can be done by installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door Supplied with VISTA 32F B or by installing a UL Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access Wire the selected device to any EOLR supervised zone zone 1 8 Program this zone for day trouble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems Remote downloading and auto disarming are not UL Listed features UL864 NFPA Local Fire Configure at least one bell output for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators to it Program this bell for temporal sounding UL864 NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire Size the backup battery for 24 hour standby central s
259. s protection distributed among up to 2 partitions The following table lists the zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system and some alternate functions the zones may be used as Zone Sensors land 2 2 wire Smoke Detectors if used 5 Audio Alarm Verification if used 6 Cabinet Tamper Ground F ault if used 7 K eyswitch if used 8 Latching T ype Glassbreak Detectors if used 1 8 Traditional Hardwired Zones 1 32 5800 Series Wireless Devices 9 32 Polling Loop Devices 995 1 Panic 996 3 Panic 999 x Panic Zone Type Definitions Each zone must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone In addition there are three keypad activated zones panic keys see note for each partition a polling loop supervision zone and four RF supervisory zones two for each RF receiver installed Zone types are defined below Type 00 Zone Not Used Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is not used Type 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary This zone type provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the control is armed in the AWAY or STAY Mode When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode no entry delay is provided Exit delay begins whenever the control is armed regardless of the arming mode selected These delays are programmable This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through which primary entry and exit
260. s may not respond appropriately This equipment like other electrical devices is subject to component failure Even though this equipment is designed to last as long as 20 years the electronic components could fail at any time The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly The security keypad and remote keypad should be tested as well Wireless transmitters used in some systems are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years depending on the environment usage and the specific wireless device being used External factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation This wireless system however can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate but an alarm system is not a substitute for insurance Homeowners property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue to insure their lives and property We continue to develop new and improved protection devices Users
261. seen in the left hand column of the relevant Information Conventions Used in This Manual Before you begin using this manual it is important that you understand the meaning of the following symbols icons U L These notes include specific information which must be followed if you are installing this system for a UL Listed application These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the installation and which if not observed could result in operational difficulties could cause damage to the system Please read each warning carefully This symbol also denotes warnings about physical harm to the user This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system or Enter Zn Num Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to alpha Quit keypad display prompts These prompts are shown in a single line box K20 When programming the system data fields are indicated by a star followed by the data field number PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS Unless noted otherwise references to specific model numbers represent ADEMCO products SECTION 1 General Description In This Section General Features General The VISTA 32FB is a 2 partition UL listed commercial fire and burglary control panel that Supports up to 32 zones using basic hardwired polling loop and wireless zones It also includes zones for supervision of bells p
262. seseaseeeeessaaeesseeeeseess 4 4 Panel Earth Ground Connections ccccsssscccccsssseceecceesseceeceeesececeeeaseeeeeeeeeaseceesseaaeeesseeageeeeessauaseeaseeeessaaaeeees 4 4 Section 5 Installing the K Cy Pad Sissis adadan aaia 5 1 Keypads That May Be Used cairartrstananetvnceenusnsnvsein ances potion necneruiemmanatekianhnrat anit akenmnanE 5 1 Wiring to the Keypads sernassa Aaa AAA RA ANAE tists temas ta ANANA ENRE DRA AE DARREN eens 5 1 Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional KeypadS sesssssseressrrrrresrrreressrrrrresrrrrressnn 5 2 Mounting Me K ypa enan r EE E 5 3 Addressing the K eypads Preliminary Checkout Procedure cccccssssecccccesssseeeceseeeseeeeeeseaseeeesseaseeeeessaaeeeeess 5 3 Section 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001 O08 cccssssssscsssssssscessnsseeeesessesesnnesseeeesensseeeennssseesnnssssseesnnssssessnaess 6 1 Common Characteristics Of Hardwired ZONES 1 8 ccccccsssecccccessssecececeeeseeeeeeeeeseceeeseaueeeeeesueaeeeeesseageeeeeeseneeas 6 1 Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to ZONES 1 8 ccceececccccsessseeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeseaaeeessauaaeeeeessaaeeeeseeeessaages 6 1 Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to ZONES 1 ANC 2 ccccecccccsssseeececeesseceeeceeaseeeeesaeseeeeeseaaseeeessuaaseeeessaageessssages 6 2 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors cc cceecceccsssseeeecceeseceeceseeseceeeeeasseeeseeeauaaeceeeesagaeeesessagaeeeesssageeesssaseeesenes 6 3 Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors
263. sible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chet pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communications ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel aux prises d abonn s sauf dans les cas precis pr vus par les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations du mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es pas un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil a la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise en terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques de r seau de conduites d eau s il y en a soient raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales NX Avertissement L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou a un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign a chaque dispositif terminal pour viter toute surcharge indique le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord a un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre const
264. signals are triggered when a smoke detector gets dirty and indicate that the detector should be cleaned or replaced If a detector maintains a high or a low sensitivity condition for longer than 24 hours the control sends a Dialer report to the monitoring agency trouble message for non Contact ID reports Event Code 385 or 386 for Contact ID reports It also makes an event log entry and displays HSENS xxx or LSENS xxx at the keypads xxx zone number Note 5808 Wireless Smoke Detectors report high sensitivity regardless of whether the condition is actually high sensitivity or low sensitivity 2 Partitions Provides the ability to control 2 separate areas independently each functioning as if it had its own separate control Partitioning features include e A common lobby partition 1 2 that can be programmed to arm automatically when the partition that shares the common lobby is armed and to disarm when the partition that shares the common lobby is disarmed e A master partition 3 used strictly to assign keypads for the purpose of viewing the status of all partitions at the same time master keypads Section 1 General Description All zones except fire that can be assigned to either of two partitions Fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1 K eypads that can be assigned to either of two partitions or to Master Partition 3 to view system status Ability to assign relays to one or both partitions Ability to display fi
265. sons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may not work are as follows Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned Smoke detectors may not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys in walls or roofs or on the other side of closed doors Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building A second floor detector for example may not sense a first floor or basement fire Finally smoke detectors have sensing limitations No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time In general detectors may not always warn about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed violent explosions escaping gas improper storage of flammable materials overloaded electrical circuits children playing with matches or arson Depending on the nature of the fire and or location of the smoke detectors the detector even if it operates as anticipated may not provide sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation manual Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection They do create multiple beams of protection and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams They cannot detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind
266. ss upon entry or exit after faulting the entry exit zone to reach the keypad to disarm the system Since this zone type is designed to provide an instant alarm if the entry exit zone is not violated first it will protect an area in the event an intruder hides on the premises before the system is armed or gains access to the premises through an unprotected area Type 05 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night This zone type will give an instant alarm if faulted when armed in the AWAY STAY INSTANT or MAXIMUM night Mode During the disarmed state day the system will provide a latched trouble sounding from the keypad and a central station report if desired This zone type is usually assigned toa zone that contains a foil protected door or window such as in a store or to a zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room drug supply room etc It can also be used on a sensor or contact in an area where immediate notification of an entry is desired Type 06 24 Hour Silent Alarm This zone type sends a report to the central station but provides no keypad display or sounding This zone type Is usually assigned to a zone containing an emergency button Type 07 24 Hour Audible Alarm This zone type sends a report to the central station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external alarm This zone type is usually assigned to a zone that has an emergency button Type 08 24 Hour Auxiliary Alarm This zone type sends a report
267. ssaaeeeeeessaaeeeees sesessaaaeeeess 14 3 Figure 15 1 Auxiliary Relay Used as Unsupervised Bell OutpUut nsnsessnrenensrrrrresrrrrnensrrrrresrnrnrensrrrreesene 15 1 Figure 15 2 Auxiliary Relay Used for Resetting 4 Wire Smoke Detectors cccceeeeeceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeees 15 2 Figure 17 1 Event Log Printer COMNMECUIONS ccccceceecccccesseeeeeecsesseceeecueseeeeeseeaeeeeeeseasseeessseaeeeeessasesessaaeeeenss 17 2 Figure 18 1 Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer ccccccccccsssseeeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeaeeeesssaeeeees 18 2 Figure 18 2 Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer ccccccssseeccecseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeeeeeesseaeseesssaaaeeess 18 3 Figure 25 1 Direct Wire Downloading ConnectionS cccseeecccccseseeeececeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeesseaaseeeessseaeeeeessuageeseaaseees 26 4 VISTA 32F B Summary Of CONNECCIONS ccccccssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaseeeeseeaeeeessaaeeeeseeaas Inside Rear Cover How To Use This Manual This manual is written to accommodate both the new and the experienced installer of ADEMCO products A general description of the entire system is located at the beginning of the manual followed by the basics of programming The wiring and physical setup of the hardware follows The sections at the core of the manual include both hardware setup and programming requirements of each device to make that specific device operational in the system A checkout procedure is i
268. sscensnewsvasnedatuiatuwd aA E adamant 24 3 Open Close Deimons eera a aa a aah 24 4 scheduling Menu ModE senna A A A A N aes 24 6 SHEUNG Menu SUU Co a A E EE tans 24 7 TNE WINdOWS sieo a e E AA 24 8 Dally Open Close SCNEdUIES sorei E a A A 24 9 HONAJ SCV CO UE ES ae T a 24 10 TIME DFIVOTE VOIS earo A NOT 24 11 Limitation or ACCESS Schedules soricei E E E Ree 24 16 TEMPORARY o Nedu esain E AE A eid va bees aa etae 24 17 User SCNEdUIING Menu Mode rene a N N AA AAE 24 19 Section 25 System COMMUNICATION s ssssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 25 1 A SUCCCSSTUN aNs MISS OM anana naa a sans N A a N ANONA aunt neds 25 1 REDOING FONAS senan a Vane aaa ameanea gees 25 1 Loading Communication Derault egaa E E A A 25 4 Section 26 Downloading Primer vecvissscssccsssscvsessncscsscsndsvcvscuasnecucsuucsevscsncnsdessenccsarsecsnsvasdscusdsnessvscsusnddnieccsusen 26 1 censal TATOM ON e a E A eating uienoaeiana 26 1 Getting On Line with a Control Panel ssssssnsessrrrnsesrrrrresrrrrrresrnrrrnssrrrrrosnnrrresrnrrreesnnrrrrennnnrrnrnrenrnrrrennne 26 2 onLine control FUNCIONS assie a a gate eerie a alae 26 2 ACCESS SCY arara a E E 26 3 Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading ess sssssessrrrrsesrrrrressrrrrnesrrrrressrrrreesrrrrreserrne 26 3 Section 27 Setting the Real Time COCK sanssisisccnisssstecuastersdecdsncsnscndaadsacundsdcssuaccsdsveccsccanesc
269. ssseeeseeeeseeessseeeeees 24 8 Timed E VERE aasan N A 24 7 Time Driven Event Programming 24 13 Time Driven Event Worksheet ccccccccsssseeeeeees 24 11 TOADD a Master Manager or Operator Code 28 4 To Add an RF Key toan Existing USEf 008 28 6 TOCHANGE a Master Manager or Operator Code28 6 To Delete a Master Manager or Operator Code 28 7 TOEXIT The User Edit Mode 28 7 Total Control Panel Load Worksheets 0000000 19 3 TOUCH TONE W ROTARY BACKUP e 23 13 Transmitter Battery Lif cc eeecccssssssseeeeeeseseeeees 8 6 Transmitter D Sniffer Mode ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 9 Transmitter Input TYP s cccccceecesesssssseseeeeeesseeeees 8 5 Transmitter Supervision ssssssssssssssrrrrrrsessrrrrrrreserrnne 8 5 TRIGGER OUTPUTS FUNCTION SELECTION 23 19 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night Type 05 21 2 TEROUDI GS Conditions ceira niena a h 30 4 Trouble Messages sssssnrresssrnrrrrressrrrrreesrrnrrenene 30 4 Turning the System Over to the US f eesen 30 6 UL Installation Requirements ccccseseeeeeeeeeeees A 1 UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm A 2 UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises L ocal Mercantile Safe amp Vault ssssssssssesssrnrrrreessrrrrrrne A 2 UL611 UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm A 2 UL864 NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fir EE A E E A A A A E E E A 1 UL864 NFPA Local Fire sssssssssss
270. sssrrrrrrrsssrrrrrressrnnn A 1 UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION 2 3 Unsupervised RF st utsiives sariaretiei ten ceeiece rien even 8 5 USE LONG RANGE RADIO IF DIALER FAILS 23 7 USE LONG RANGE RADIO ONLY 23 7 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS aeee 23 17 User ACCESS C OCS tiadiss td aa a 28 1 User Code COMMANAS ccccccssssssseeeeeesessssseeeeeeeeens B 1 Usar COdES renn aaier N N AAN 1 3 User Codes Authority LeVEIS cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeees 28 1 User Scheduling Menu Mode ccccccccssesssseeeeeeees 24 19 USEF S fain isnt ea reuls cats e esd a iania edal 2 1 Using a Supplementary Power SUppIy cccceeeeees 5 2 Using the Built in User s Manual sessen 29 4 Index 6 View Capapiil ll CScticcsuchusisece ce ctestentessaeia renee mabieeseenee 28 1 Viewing Capabilities Of A USET cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 4 Viewing Data Fields ceccccccssessseeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeseas 20 2 Viewing Downloaded M eSSad6 sscseeeeesseeeeeeeees 29 4 VIEWING ZONE DESCIIPtOIS cccceeessseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeas 29 4 MV PIVOT ecics dace ite ns E AA T 10 1 VIP MODULE PHONE CODE wwecousntenenvonwncey 23 2 Vista Interactive Phone M Odule cccccccecssssseeseeeeees 1 4 V0 hws o u alie e cvrne erence cern er rr ecenrrerre reer er styrene 1 5 WATERFLOW SILENCE OPTION ceee 23 18 Wire RUN Length ssnin ae A 5 1 Wireless Expansion sssssssssssssrsrrreressrnrrrrressrrrrrrrresrnnne 1 2 WIRELESS
271. stored to normal for several minutes Refer to Section 30 Testing TheSysten for additional battery test information Powering Up the System 19 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 19 8 SECTION 20 The Mechanics of Programming In This Section Using Data Fidd Program Mode System and Communication Defaults Entering Data Fidd Programming Mode Moving from One Page of Programming to Another Viewing Data Fidds Entry Errors Programming System Wide Data Fidds Programming Partition Specific Data Fidds 93 Menu Mode Programming refer to the Quick Start Guide Using Data Field Program Mode Data Field Program Mode is the program mode through which many system options are programmed The field numbers on the program form show the number of entries required for each field When an entry is completed the keypad beeps three times and advances to the next field At this point you can either make the required entry in the new field or press x plus the next field number to be programmed There are several question and answer modes called Menu modes that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode has been entered These modes prompt for information and for this reason a 2 line alpha keypad 6139 6139R is required System and Communication Defaults e The system is shipped with a set of pre programmed default values that are designed to meet the needs of many installations These values can be change
272. sudsnvauccsustadveaweusas 27 1 oenar Mal ON esn a yay a aa a a aa aeaa 27 1 Setting CNS Tinie and Data nis a N 27 1 Section 28 User ACCESS COGS uiuia aaa a a 28 1 General AO Mat ON eea a a a a a T A N 28 1 User Codes and Lels OF AUG OF ICY orisni A A penta tise halacieds beetanteieas 28 1 TOADD a Master Manager Or Operator COG ccccccssssececccsssseccecceeseeeeceseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseaaeeeeeeesseaseeessaagses 28 4 TOCHANGE a Master Manager or Operator Code ccccccccccssseeeesseeseceeceeseeseeeeeseueuseeeessuaaseeeessaaeeeeeenaaes 28 6 TOAGG an RE Key tO an EXIStINg U SEF reunia si vaiveatouiasiucnkessedcs4ientea a ai a 28 6 To Delete a Master Manager or Operator COd cccccsssseeccccesecececseeseeeeeesaeseceeeseeeseeeeesseaeeesessaaeeeessagaess 28 7 TORE KAT these EEMO Sains baz a A N 28 7 Section 29 Keypad FUNCTIONS icsi aiaa aa a E aAa Eaa aaea 29 1 General IANO aaa a a genesis a a a a a aa a 29 1 ATONIO FONTON aaa E N 29 2 GODS AU INO sera a a A 29 3 ACCESS CONTO oae a E N E GiIeGeie une Fenee 29 3 DeayYMI CHOS HAG IP INE a a E O a eeu 29 3 Partition GOTO Comma erutie a aaO 29 4 Viewing Capabilities OF a USET ananin a A N A alee 29 4 VIEWMOG ZONE DESCIPLE Sinia A a E a a E 29 4 Viewing Downloaded M ESSAGEG ccccsssseeecccsessececcceeseceeceseuseceecessenseceeessauaeceeesseaaceeessauacesenseuseeessuagseeesenaas 29 4 Using Ene BU User s Manuala E N E NA 29 4 Table of Contents PUIG
273. t depending on report format primary subscriber account number 00 09 B F 11 15 Each number requires a 2 digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits B F If a 3 digit account number is to be used enter data only in the first 3 locations leaving the last one unfilled by entering a x This field is used to enter the primary central station phone number up to 17 digits O 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause This is the phone number the control will use to transmit alarm and status messages to the central station Do not fill unused spaces Note Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is entered and no dual split options have been programmed the number of attempts to the primary number before dialing the secondary number is determined by field 3 21 SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER This field is used to enter the secondary phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause The secondary phone number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful or if split dual reporting is desired Do not fill unused spaces If this field is programmed a secondary subscriber account number field 90 must also be programmed can be the same as the primary account number 35 36 37 38 39 Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER This field ts applicable only if downloading will be utilized Enter the downl
274. t press any key for 10 seconds 28 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 28 8 SECTION 29 Keypad Functions In This Section General Information Arming Functions Global Arming Access Control Delaying Closing Time Partition Go To Command Viewing Capabilities of a User Viewing Zone Descriptors Viewing Downloaded Messages Using the Built in User s Guide Panic Keys Speed Key D Macros Manual Raday Activation Mode 0 Mode General Information The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system and perform other system functions such as bypassing zones viewing messages from the central station and displaying zone descriptors Zone and system conditions alarm trouble bypass are shown in the display window When an alarm occurs keypad sounding and external sounding will occur and the zone s in alarm will be displayed on the keypad Pressing any key will silence the keypad sounder for 10 seconds Disarming the system will silence both keypad and external sounders When the system is disarmed the system s memory of alarm causes any zones that were in an alarm condition during the armed period to be displayed Toclear this display simply repeat the disarm sequence enter the security code and press the OFF key The keypads also feature chime annunciation and three panic keys for silent audible fire or personal emergency alarms that can notify the central stati
275. t readily accessible to the general public The back of the control cabinet has four holes for this purpose e Before mounting the circuit board remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that will be used DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED Installing the Cabinet Lock Use an ADEMCO No N6277 Cam Lock and No N6277 1 Clip supplied with the panel RETAINER CLIP NOTE POSITION 1 Insert the key into the lock Position the lock in the hole making certain that the latch ac aie le will make contact with the CEO aot latch bracket when the door is ve ae closed a4 UNLOCKED 2 While holding the lock steady insert the retainer clip into the retainer slots CABINET DOOR BOTTOM Figure 4 1 Installing the Lock 4 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide For UL installations that require certificate burglary service the optional VISTA ULKT attack U L resistant enclosure kit and optional 1451 wired in transformer must be used Follow the special installation requirements described in the applicable Grade A Listing sections below Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing e The panel door must be supervised Mount the clip on tamper switch Supplied with the VISTA ULKT enclosure kit to the cabinet s right side wall as shown in the diagram below and wire it to zone 6 e Usea bell with a tamper protected housing such as the ADEMCO AB12 The bell housing s tamp
276. t these reports by partition Section 13 7820 Long Range Radio Trouble Messages The following messages will be displayed on the 6139 Alpha Keypad when a problem exists in the Long Range Radio 1 LRR Battery The battery connected to the radio is low 2 PLL out of Lock The radio has an internal fault and cannot transmit any messages 3 Early Power Detect RF power is detected without a valid transmission 4 Power Unattained Full RF power was never attained 5 Frwd Power Loss RF power was not sustained throughout the transmission 6 Antenna Fault A problem with the antenna has been detected 7 LRR CRC is bad The radio s EEPROM ts corrupt the internal CRC is bad Items 2 and 3 require factory service Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low battery For Item 6 check the antenna connection and cable If the connections are secure factory service is required Note All these messages will be displayed in conjunction with the CHECK 8xx message that indicates a trouble on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in the control All of the above events except Antenna F ault will be sent to the event log and reported to the central station using Contact D Event Code 333 expansion device trouble Antenna Fault will use Event Code 357 If the tamper is tripped on the LRR it will use Event Code 341 expansion device tamper 13 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 13 4 SECTION 14 Ex
277. taiuinier aires 20 2 PMG V ETTO Sick secession cuit aruba ence es bats nati de se a else vets ano A as reels 20 3 Programming System Wide Data FieldS ccccccccssssseecceceeeseceeeceeeeeeeeesseaseeeeseaaaseeeessuaaceeeesuaaeeeeessaaeeessaagess 20 3 Programming Partition Specific Data Field ccccccssscccccceseeceeccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeueeeeesseaeeesessaaaeseeeseessanagess 20 3 FI CUM Ode PCOOK ath G ituasseieiantiliva wee a a ae inriea aiaieon tae e Romine 20 4 Section 21 Zone Type Definitions ssiecsicacdiassccndccnnsscacutescvaveucnsavscecnsaiasdennastsecdvsastaisiesnanassdvaauatisiuaciesaaduanenntes 21 1 Zone Number DesIGNGLIONS enon a a O a E A 21 1 ZONE TYVE DENIES corea a AI trearnane 21 1 Section 22 Zone I ndex Zone Type Defaul tS sccsssssscccssnsssceesssssseeennssseseesnnsssseennnsseseennssseseesnassssesssesonas 22 1 ZONE INA aspect atypia cacti ean volo ap sere aves doesn atv oe na nae ae eng a Seamed 22 1 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide ZONES TY DCD GTAUUCS ensenen inar AA E EET Ohio teresa 22 2 Section 23 Data Field Descriptions wiiiccntsscsceccsscesdsncsnericcssencuscodsaeceversscnesuucssusessucnacssenesnanddsssnucsiondandecssuson 23 1 SECTION 24 SCHEAGUIING O PEIONS iisinisnddsccducsdedsiantensevanedeudusstustsducacscensevinssvaneesndsaavueeusuctsacdwensudavanceunesienddsmeususe 24 1 HEFOOUGCEION LOS CeCUINIMN Cision giana erprann a N T naan aan Hepsi N ra 24 1 TMe WAIN GOW DENION S tiatati
278. tall a smoke detector inside every bedroom where someone sleeps with the door partly or completely closed Smoke could be blocked by the closed door Also an alarm in the hallway outside may not wake up the sleeper if the door is closed e Install a smoke detector inside bedrooms where electrical appliances Such as portable heaters air conditioners or humidifiers are used e Install a smoke detector at both ends of a hallway if the hallway is more than 40 feet 12 meters long e Install smoke detectors in any room where an alarm control is located or in any room where alarm control connections to an AC source or phone lines are made If detectors are not so located a fire within the room could prevent the control from reporting a fire or an intrusion A d a KITCHEN DINING BDRM E LIVING ROOM BDRM a w w HB Smoke Detectors for Minimum Protection 3 Smoke Detectors for Additional Protectior A Heat Activated Detectors w TV ROOM BEDROOM O UL This control complies with NFPA requirements for temporal pulse sounding of fire notification devices E BEDROOM w w TO A CLOSED DOOR GARAGE LVNG RM BASEMENT Recommendations For Proper Intrusion Protection For proper intrusion coverage sensors should be located at every possible point of entry to a home or commercial premises This would include any skylights that may be present and the upper windows in a multi level building In
279. tallation and S amp U p Guide RF 8 2 5800 Series Reor zons 5881E H up to 32 use w U L864 installations In Canada 5800 systems must use 5882 Series receivers 5882L 5882H Information in this manual relative to the 5881 receivers applies as well to the 5882 receivers 5881 and 5882 receivers can all use the same transmitters System Operation and Supervision e The receiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters at 345M Hz in the USA 315MHz in Canada within a nominal range of 200 feet and relays this tnformation to the control e Each supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the receiver every 70 90 minutes If after a programmed interval of time eg 12 hrs the receiver does not hear from a particular transmitter the word CHECK or TRBL will appear at the corresponding partition s keypad s accompanied by the zone number in question The trouble will not prevent the installer from arming the panel but the zone must first be bypassed e Zones 988 and 990 are used to Supervise the RF reception of receivers 2 and 1 respectively The reception is supervised for two conditions 1 If within a programmed interval of time defined by program field 130 the receiver does not hear from any of its transmitters A CHECK or TRBL message will appear for zones 988 second receiver or 990 first receiver if response type 19 Is assigned to these supervisory zones and if programmed
280. tation or 60 hour standby remote station time For central station service the 7720ULF or 7920SE LORRAS can be used alone the main dialer with a LORRA or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module For remote station service use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module When using the LORRA connect its channel inputs to the VISTA 32F Bs fire alarm fire supervisory if used and trouble triggers Also connect its XMIT OKAY output to Input l on the VISTA 32FBs J 2 header Program J 2 Input 1 system Zone 973 for 24 hour trouble response type 19 to send radio faults When the main dialer is used enable it field 3 30 and connect it to a telephone line Assign a 24 hour trouble response type 19 to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision The VISTA 32FB will activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main dialer supervision fault When the backup dialer is used install it on the VISTA 32F Bs PCB shield Enable it field 3 30 and connect it to a separate telephone line Assign a 24 hour trouble response type 19 to system zone 975 to enable backup dialer Supervision VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide e When the dialer is used program it to send fire alarm fire Supervisory if used trouble AC loss low battery normal dialer test and off normal dialer test reports Field 27 must be set to 024 maximum so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours e f a secon
281. tens of hours digit of the start of window entry Enter the desired start of window hour and press The cursor will move to the minutes Enter the desired minutes and press Toggle the AM PM indication by pressing any key 0 9 while the cursor is under the A P position and then press kK Repeat this to program the stop of window entry When the entry is completed the TIME WINDOW prompt is displayed again Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure Quit Enter Oat the QUIT prompt to return to the main menu 1 YES 0 NO 0 choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode Since the time windows are shared among all partitions it is important to make sure that changing a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions 24 8 Section 24 Scheduling Options Daily Open Close Schedules Open Close Schedule Worksheet Write in the previously defined time window numbers for open and close for each partition Mo Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol Op Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl n Cl Lat bt Eee t EM ee A ee eee Open Close Schedule Programming Each partition can be assigned one daily open close schedule plus a holiday open close schedule Temporary schedules are programmed separately using the 81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode To program additional open close schedules see Time Driven Event Programming After entering Schedul
282. ternal Sounders In This Section General Information Bal Circuit Supervision Wiring Bal Outputs Compatible Alarm I ndicating Devices Programming the Bal Outputs General Information The VISTA 32FB provides two bell circuit outputs for operating fire and burglary alarm notification appliances Each bell output is rated as follows 10VDC 14VDC 1 7 amps max power limited Note that the total alarm current drawn from the Aux Power 1 Aux Power 2 polling loop Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs cannot exceed 2 3 amps for battery independent operation Each output has the following options e Class B supervision style Y or no Supervision e Selectable to activate by individual zone assignments e Selectable for Confirmation of Arming Ding 1 2 sec sounding to confirm system has armed e Selectable to chime when entry exit or perimeter zones are faulted e Selectable for steady or pulsing output e Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2 30 minutes The optional PS24 Power Supply Module may be used to convert one or both of the VISTA 32FB 12VDC 1 7A supervised bell outputs to 24VFW 1 7A supervised bell outputs The PS24 module must be used with the optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit PS24 mounts in this kit s enclosure and the optional 1451 24 dual 18VAC 30VAC secondary transformer The PS24 is powered from the 30VAC winding of this transformer U L e Burglary bell circuits must be programmed for a timeout of 16 minutes o
283. the VIP Module The 4285 4286 is wired between the control panel and the premises handset s See Figure 10 1 It listens for touch tones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel During on premises phone access it powers the premises phones during off premises phone access it seizes the line from the premises phones and any answering machines 1 Make 12V and and data in and data out connections from the VIP Module to the control using the connector cable supplied with the VIP Module These are the same connections as for remote keypads 2 Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the VIP Module 3 Connect terminals 1 through 7 on the VIP Module as shown Terminal Block Connections 4285 4286 Terminal Connects to 1 Phone In Tip green wire of direct connect cord 2 Phone In Ring red wire of direct connect cord 3 Phone Out Tip brown wire of direct connect cord 4 Phone Out Ring gray wire of direct connect cord 5 No Connection Supported by the 4286 only Use an RJ 31X J ack with the phone cable supplied with the control Use an additional RJ 31X J ack and a direct connect cord to make connections to the 4285 4286 10 2 Section 10 4285 4286 VIP Module INCOMING TELCO LINE C CALLER ID UNIT GRAY RJ31X 8 CONDUCTOR DOUBLE PLUG JACK PREMISES CORD SUPPLIED gt gt TT ANSWERING T o g MACHINE AND 2 PHONES ANSWERING
284. the VISTA 32F B follow the steps below to make connections to earth ground 1 Run an earth ground wire into the built in transformer s enclosure via the same knockout used for the 120VAC wiring 2 Usea wire nut not supplied to splice this earth ground wire to the green flying lead located inside of and bonded to the built in transformer s enclosure Push the mated wires into the enclosure 3 Connect the green flying lead which emerges from the top of the transformer s enclosure to the earth ground terminal terminal 30 on the VISTA 32FB 4 Replace the transformer enclosure cover after wiring is complete When using the optional 1451 transformer follow the steps below to make connections to earth ground 1 Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 enclosure to a good earth ground use grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code 2 Usea green nut Supplied to secure the wire to the ground post The earth ground wire should be the only wire under this nut 3 Runa 16AWG wire from this post to the panel s earth ground terminal terminal 30 Use a second green nut Supplied to secure this wire to the ground post This method of connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 and panel are connected to different earth ground systems The panel requires this connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices and earth ground supervision to function properly SECTION 5 I
285. the central station from taking action on a potential false alarm After the panel s initial call to report the alarm the panel may attempt to make an additional call perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoration If Call Waiting is not defeated an operator at the central station attempting to contact the premises to verify whether the alarm is valid would hear the phone ringing indefinitely and have to dispatch on the call This option enabled in program field 1 42 attempts to defeat Call Waiting on the first outgoing call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers It does this by dialing a Special sequence preceding the phone number but after the PABX number The panel will dial 70 if using touchtone and 1170 if using rotary The panel does not attempt to defeat Call Waiting on each call attempt because the phone company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone line that does not have Call Waiting VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide SECTION 4 Installing the Control In This Section Mounting the Control Cabinet Installing the Cabinet Lock GradeA Mercantile Premises Listing GradeA Mercantile Safeand Vault Listing Installing the Control s Circuit Board Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery Pana Earth Ground Connections Mounting the Control Cabinet e Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors not supplied ina clean dry area that is no
286. time windows the system can automatically activate and de activate relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other devices on and off e Thetime driven events can be activated at different times in relation to the time window 1 At the beginning of a time window 2 Attheend of atime window 3 Duringa time window active period only on at beginning of window off at end 4 At both the beginning and end of the time window e g to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a coffee break e The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis or can be made to perform an action only once e g turn on the porch light this Wednesday at 8 00 pm e The system also provides up to 20 programmable timers available to the end user for the purpose of activating output devices at preset times and on preset days Limitation of Access of Users by Time e A user s access can be limited to a certain time period during which he can perform system functions Outside this time that user s code will be inactive e The system provides up to 8 access schedules each consisting of two time windows typically one for opening one for closing for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays e The access schedules are programmed in the 80 Menu Mode and enabled for a given user when that user s access code is added to the system e fa user tries to operate the system outside of the schedule the alpha keypad will display ACCESS DE
287. tion and WILIING cccccccsssssececceeessceecceeuseceeessaueceeecseaseceesseaaseeeesseaseesagees 12 2 Remote Keyswitch Operation and WILING cccccccssssseceeceesesseeecceseseeeeceeseceeesseuaecesesseuseceessuaaseeesesaeesssaagaes 12 2 SAOLE Dil Oneal On Modul Cass nnciaiess caida trasisen danas N aA Lenni 12 4 AUXILLALY Alarm Signaling E GUI DIMEN aae a A A A 12 5 Event LOGP ANCE CONNECTIONS anari iea A A E A 12 8 DIFSE WIrSDOwnNIOJdIN Oona a NAA NA AAAA A ire 12 8 Section 13 7820 7835 7835C Long Range RadioO sssssnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 13 1 General 1 RCEIMALLON sonaren a a aa a aa a 13 1 Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control cccccssssecccccesseeeeeceeeeceeeeeseeseeeceseeeeeeeesseseeeesssaasesesseeeesesaas 13 2 Programming the Control for the LONG Range Radio sssesssresesrrrreesrrrrresrrrrensrrrrrenrrrrenrnrrreenrrreesrrrrrenrne 13 2 OOS I SS SACS tress a sacs is insane caetin tassios A E NA mere aude 13 3 Table of Contents Section 14 External SOU NGO S issicctatanssiicncsntadsdnaccassnnaasetuassassdesvassadusenausssnasnabunsatedednssuagunssntsduaustuncsatasvanssates 14 1 SIAL VEO VA ON sista is a tach on ares t a oda adie ai canta cies cto Sanaa eta tie ed edn wae eee aay a 14 1 Bll GIPCULE SUPEI SION aar a A et meneame 14 1 Winnog B CUNEO eassa iacnew waa geet necator A ees 14 2 Compatible Alarm I ndicating D VICES ccccccccsssseee
288. to exit Program Mode If the number of digits entered in a data field is less than the maximum permitted for example a phone number the keypad displays the last entry and waits To proceed enter x the next data field to be programmed e g press 08 Partition specific programming fields are skipped unless entered specifically or the system is set up for 1 partition only To change to the next page of fields press 94 To return to the previous page of fields press x99 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields To program partition specific data fields once in Program Mode do the following L Press 91 which prompts for the partition number desired 20 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 2 Enter a partition specific field number e g 09 to begin programming When the first field s entry is completed the next partition specific field will automatically be displayed When all partition specific fields are programmed the system returns to the global programming fields page 1 fields To return to the global program fields before finishing all fields enter any global field number 3 Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation PROGRAMMING PARTITION SPECIFIC FIELDS Press 91 to select a partition J Enter the partition to be programmed J Enter a partition specific field number and make entry J After partition specific fields are programmed press 91 to sele
289. tors will appear one at a time for about 2 3 seconds each For faster viewing press the READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order and so on When all descriptors have been displayed the control will exit Display Mode Enter the Security Code and press the OFF key to exit Display Mode before all descriptors have been displayed Viewing Downloaded Messages Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company displayed on an alpha keypad When this occurs the keypad will display the following message MESSAGE Press Ofor 5 secs Instruct the user to press and hold the O key to display the central station s message Note that the system must bein the READY state to view these messages Using the Built in User s Manual 29 4 An abbreviated User s Manual is stored in the system s memory and can be particularly useful to the end user if the printed User s Manual is not conveniently accessible when the user needs to perform a seldom used and unfamiliar system procedure The Built in User s Guide is displayed by simply pressing any of the function keys e g OFF AWAY STAY MAXIMUM BYPASS INSTANT CODE TEST READY and CHIME for approximately 5 seconds and then releasing it Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has been pressed will then be displayed 2 lines of text are displayed at a time This function operates in either the armed or the disarmed state Section 29 Keypad Functions
290. transmitted Has unique input code Dual element passive infrared detector transmitter with built in selectable pulse count Has unique input code Note Thereis a 3 minute lock out between fault transmissions to conserve battery life Each wireless zone must be programmed into the system which assigns characteristics that define the way the system responds to faults on that zone Refer to 93 Menu Mode in the Quick Start Guidefor instructions on programming wireless zones 8 8 Section 8 Wirdess Zone Expansion Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that transmitters have all been properly programmed 1 Enter Installer Code 3 Keypad s will display all zone numbers of wireless units programmed for that partition 2 Fault each wireless zone causing each device to transmit As the system receives a Signal from each of the transmitters the zone number of that transmitter will disappear from the display A transmitter not enrolled will not turn off its zone number 3 Toexit the Transmitter Sniffer Mode enter Installer Code 1 Be sure to perform the Transmitter Sniffer Mode Test for every partition that has wireless transmitters programmed Go No Go Test Mode Before mounting transmitters permanently conduct Go No Go Tests to verify adequate Signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary Make s
291. transmitter within a programmed period field 1 31 the missing transmitter number s and CHECK or TRBL will be displayed The supervision for a particular transmitter that may be carried off the premises 5801 5802MN may be turned off by enrolling it as an Unsupervised RF UR type as described later in this manual Some 5800 Series transmitters have built in tamper protection and will annunciate a CHECK or TRBL condition if covers are removed Transmitter Input Types All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory assigned input loop codes Each of the inputs requires its own programming zone e g a 5804 s four button inputs require four programming zones Transmitters can be programmed as one of the following types RF Sends periodic check in signals as well as Fault Supervised RF Restore and Low Battery signals The transmitter must remain within the receiver s range UR Sends all the signals that the RF type does but the Unsupervised RF control does not supervise the check in signals The transmitter may therefore be carried off premises BR These only send fault signals They only send low Unsupervised Button battery signals when they are activated button RF pressed Thetransmitter may be carried off premises 8 5 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide Transmitter Battery Life e Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years depending on the environ
292. tructions provided with the receiver for further installation procedures regarding antenna mounting etc A ANTENNAS L INSERT IN RIGHT HAND TERMINALS RED BLACK TO CONTROL S REMOTE KEYPAD CONNECTION CIRCUIT CREEN POINTS EACH RECEIVER BOARD s WIRING MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL OPENING HOMERUN MOUNTING INTERFERENCE DIP SwitcH SOCKET HOLES INDICATOR M KNOCKOUT LED _ ___ gt AREA FOR SURFACE WIRING ON 4 gt OFF O Te WH NOTE DIP SWITCH POSITION 5 PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH SWITCH POSITION ON SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL FIRE EEEo 5 PRESENT ON APPLICATIONS SEE THE RECEIVER S INSTRUCTIONS EEEn 5881EH ONLY OFF USE IN NONCOMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS Z Figure 8 1 5881 RF Receiver cover removed 8 3 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 4 Set the receiver s DIP switches for an address 01 07 that is not being used by another device i e Keypads relay modules etc Take note of the address selected for the RF receiver as this address must be enabled in the system s Device Programming in 93 Menu Mode refer to the Quick Start Guide Installing the 5800TM Module Installation of this module is necessary only if one or more 5827BD Wireless Bi directional keypads or 5804BD Bi directional keys are being used The 5800TM must be located next to the 5881 Receiver between one and two feet from the receiver s antennas The 5800TM must not be installed within the contro
293. ure that all partitions are disarmed when performing this test Since the wireless receiver gain is reduced checking in this mode assists in determining good mounting locations for the transmitters and verifies that the RF transmission has sufficient signal amplitude margin for the installed system 1 Enter Installer Code 5 Note For multi partition systems make sure all partitions are disarmed before entering this mode 2 Oncetransmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate length of wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter s screw terminals fault each transmitter Note Do not conduct this test with your hand wrapped around the transmitter as this will cause inaccurate results e fa single receiver is used the keypad will beep three times to indicate signal reception If two receivers are used the keypad will beep once if the first receiver received the signal twice if the second receiver received the signal and three times if both receivers heard the signal which is desirable for redundant configurations e f the keypad does not beep reorient or move the transmitter to another location Usually a few inches in either direction is all that is required 3 Mount the transmitter according to the instructions provided with the transmitter 4 Exit the mode by entering Installer Code 1 8 9 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 8 10 SECTION 9 Relay Outputs
294. ux Standby Pwr Total Power Standby Time F using Main Dialer Line Seize Ringer Equivalence FCC Registration No TLM Threshold Formats Agency Listings Burglary Fire 14 1 2 H X 12 1 2 W X 3 D From Built in Transformer rated 18VAC 72VA 12VDC 7AH min to 34 4AH max sealed lead acid battery NOTE Batteries larger than 14AH require the optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit 12VDC 1 7 amps max for each bell output 12VDC 1 amp max Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents must not exceed 2 3 amps 24 hours with 1 amp aux standby load or 60 hours with 205mA aux Standby load using 34 4AH battery Battery input auxiliary and bell power outputs are protected using PTC circuit protectors All outputs are power limited Double Pole 0 7B AC398U 68192 AL E Good line when tip to ring voltage greater than approximately 25V 13 when blue jumper cut or when handset current greater than approximately 10mA Bad line when both voltage and current below these levels ADEMCO High Speed ADEMCO 4 2 Express ADEMCO Low Speed ADEMCO Contact ID Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault UL611 UL1610 Grades A AA Central Station UL365 Grades A AA Police Connect Requires optional VISTA ULKT enclosure kit and 1451 transformer UL864 NFPA 72 Local Central Station and Remote Station 5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE Physical FCC Registr
295. vening Appendix A Regulatory Agency Statenents CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS DOC STATEMENT NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This pr
296. w disarming only during the disarm window regardless of system status If field 2x10 is set to O for a partition this field 2x11 has no effect for that partition Section 23 Data Fidd Descriptions 2x18 ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION partition specific of Enter Lif this partition is to be accessed from another partition s keypad using the GOTO command Otherwise enter 0O 2x19 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTOR 0 Enter Lif partition descriptors will be programmed If enabled the normal keypad display will include a partition number and four digit descriptor Enter 0 to cause the keypads to display a nonpartitioned system type of display no partition number will appear 2x20 ENABLE J2 TRIGGERS FOR PARTITION partition specific 221 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LRR fooooo I F B P S T Used for supervised connection to 7920SE Enter 1 to enable pulses for each type of LRR trigger Fire Burglary silent Panic Supervisory Trouble This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses on theJ 2 radio triggers These pulses are used by the 7920SE to determine that its connection to the control is still intact Enter 0 if not desired Must be 1 for commercial fire and UL 222 DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS partition specific of Enter 1 to allow fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition s keypad s Otherwise enter O 2 23 DISPLAY BURG and PANIC ALARMS OF OT
297. week Temporary Schedule Worksheet PartitionWindows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri sat sun 1 Disarm Window startime HH TE Somme HH TE T S farmwintow Jo C S T O ST o o startime mm oo ET Somme Hum TE 2 pisarmwintow TT starttime hemm TT _ stoptime hamm TT Arm Window fsan wn i i Jsem ww i Temporary Schedules Programming Enter User Code 81 to enter this mode Notethat only users with authority level of manager or higher can program temporary schedules A temporary schedule only affects the partition from which it is entered Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling pressing to the DAYS prompt described below and activating the appropriate days This should be considered when defining daily time windows 24 17 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide 24 18 Mon DISARM WIND 00 00AM 00 00AM Mon ARM WINDOW 00 00AM 00 00AM Tue DISARM WIND 00 00AM 00 00AM Days MTWTFSS Hit 0 7 x x This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm opening window for Monday Upon entry of this mode the cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm window Enter the desired hour Press x to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner Press x to move tothe AM PM position Pressing any key in the 0 9 range w
298. will already have been programmed If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 20 The Mechanics of Programming 00 08 09 10 11 12 INSTALLER CODE 5140 Prot The Installer s Code is a 4 digit code reserved for installation company use This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the keypad This code cannot be used to disarm the system if not used to arm the system This code cannot reenter Programming Mode if exited by the 98 command TEMPORAL SIREN PULSE 0 If either bell is selected for pulsing program field 3 15 this field will determine the rhythm and rate of pulsing as follows If enabled 1 pulse rate will be three dings and a pause repeated If disabled 0 the pulse rate will be 1 sec on 1 sec off ENTRY DELAY 1 partition specific paf Entry delay defines the delay time that allows users to re enter the premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm the system without sounding an alarm The system must be disarmed within this period or an alarm will occur Enter the entry delay time 01 15 multiplied by 15 seconds or 00 for no delay up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds 15 multiplied by 15 seconds for zones assigned to Zone Type 01 EXIT DELAY 1 partition specific paf Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises through a door that has been progr
299. written or verbal of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized WARNING OWNER S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS K3521 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION WARNING THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS THE TOTAL DELAY CONTROL UNIT PLUS SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL NOT EXCEED 60 SECONDS NO OTHER INITIATING DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC IATION S STANDARD 72 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC BATTERYMARCH PARK QUINCY MA 02269 PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER INSTALLATION OPERATION TESTING MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT NOTE As shipped Vista 32FB is suitable for UL Commercial Fire Installations Cabinet supports up to 14AH Batteries Use Vista ULKT Cabinet Kit to house up to 34 4AH Batteries Also use this kit along with 1451 Transformer for UL Listed Commercial Burglary Installations JURISDICTION CIRCUIT ZONE CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR DELAY SEC MODEL DELAY SEC O MAIN PCB SHIELD TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE Manual fire alarm automatic fire alarm sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm UL Listed
300. y F ormat ADEMCO High Speed Low Speed Format Sec 0 ADEMCOHigh Speed 53 o ol Primary Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection Radionics Dual Reporting 0 no Standard E xpanded Reporting for Primary o o o o o ol Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat Standard E xpanded Reporting for Secondary o o o o o ol Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat standard standard Alarm Rstr Bypass COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO s CONTACT ID FORMAT 94 83 51 52 ADEMCO Contact ID Low Speed Format Prim o ADEMCO Contact ID ADEMCO Contact ID x 0 ADEMCOContatID 33 o ol Primary Primary Format Secondary F ormat Low Speed F ormat Sec Checksum Verification No checksum Secondary Sescoa Radionics Selection 0 Radionics fo las Standard E xpanded Reporting for Primary o o o o o ol Bypass Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat Standard E xpanded Reporting for Secondary o o o o o ol Trbl Opn Cls Low Bat Dual Reporting standard Alarm Rstr standard Alarm Rstr Bypass 25 7 VISTA 32FB Installation and S amp U p Guide COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES ZONE LOW SPEED EXPRESSHIGH SPEED CONTACT ID 2nd 1st 2nd Ist 2nd 2nd 001 00 10 01 01 00 00 i v o 2 o o 2 o s fo o fo B 0 004 10 02 04 o o 00 0 05 e 00 hos 0 006 03 00 10 06 02 00 06 00 007 o oo o 0 o 0 _ 008 po 0 po 8 f
301. ypted information received from the computer matches its own memory e Upon a successful match the control panel will seize the phone line and call the computer back unless callback is not required The phone number to which the computer s modem is connected must be programmed into the control field 35 f Thecomputer answers usually by the second ring and executes a handshake with the panel g The panel then sends other default information to the computer If this information matches the computer s information a successful link is established This is known as being on line 1 Alarms and Trouble responses and reports are disabled during actual uploading or downloading sessions If the computer is on line but not actively uploading or downloading all alarms will report immediately All other reports will be delayed until the session is ended 2 The keypads remain active when on line with a control but are inactive during actual uploading or downloading sessions On Line Control Functions The following functions can be performed while on line with a control panel e Armthesystem in the AWAY Mode disarm the system e Bypass a zone e Force the system to accept a new program download e Shut down communication dialer functions for nonpayment of monitoring fees in an owned system e Shut down all security system functions for nonpayment for a leased system e Inhibit local keypad programming prevents takeover of your

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"